Method for time coordination for ambient and ambient presentation in a communication session

Abstract

In some embodiments, the computer system applies a time setting to the virtual environment. In some embodiments, the time setting is updated based on an event. In some embodiments, the computer system displays content in an extended display mode. In some embodiments, the computer system participates in a communication session while maintaining a display of each environment. In some embodiments, the computer system moves a portal based on user movement. In some embodiments, the computer system shares a virtual environment. The computer system can display media with simulated lighting. The computer system can share an environment. In some embodiments, the computer system selects a position for the content. The computer system can present representations of communication session participants based on the content. The computer system can present a user interface for controlling the visual appearance of an environment including the media. The computer system can change the appearance of the environment based on an environment mode.

Description

[Technical Field]

[0001] (CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS) This application claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 63 / 377,020, filed September 24, 2022, U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 63 / 502,407, filed May 15, 2023, U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 63 / 506,127, filed June 4, 2023, and U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 63 / 506,133, filed June 04, 2023, the contents of which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety for all purposes.

[0002] The present disclosure relates generally to computer systems that provide computer-generated experiences, including but not limited to electronic devices that provide virtual reality and mixed reality experiences via a display. [Background technology]

[0003] The development of computer systems for augmented reality has progressed significantly in recent years. Exemplary augmented reality environments include at least some virtual elements that replace or augment the physical world. Input devices such as cameras, controllers, joysticks, touch-sensitive surfaces, and touchscreen displays for computer systems and other electronic computing devices are used to interact with the virtual / augmented reality environment. Exemplary virtual elements include virtual objects such as digital images, video, text, icons, and control elements such as buttons and other graphics. Summary of the Invention

[0004] Some methods and interfaces for interacting with environments that include at least some virtual elements (e.g., applications, augmented reality environments, mixed reality environments, and virtual reality environments) are cumbersome, inefficient, and limited. For example, systems that provide insufficient feedback for performing actions associated with virtual objects, systems that require a series of inputs to achieve a desired result in an augmented reality environment, and systems in which manipulating virtual objects is complex and error-prone create a significant cognitive burden for users and detract from the experience of the virtual / augmented reality environment. In addition, these methods are unnecessarily time-consuming, thereby wasting computer system energy. This latter consideration is particularly important in battery-operated devices.

[0005] Therefore, there is a need for a computer system having improved methods and interfaces for providing users with computer-generated experiences that make interaction with the computer system more efficient and intuitive for the user. Such methods and interfaces can optionally complement or replace conventional methods of providing users with extended reality experiences. Such methods and interfaces reduce the number, extent, and / or type of inputs from the user by helping the user understand the connection between the input provided and the device response to that input, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface.

[0006] The above-mentioned drawbacks and other problems associated with user interfaces of computer systems are reduced or eliminated by the disclosed system. In some embodiments, the computer system is a desktop computer with an associated display. In some embodiments, the computer system is a portable device (e.g., a notebook computer, a tablet computer, or a handheld device). In some embodiments, the computer system is a personal electronic device (e.g., a wearable electronic device such as a wristwatch or a head-mounted device). In some embodiments, the computer system has a touchpad. In some embodiments, the computer system has one or more cameras. In some embodiments, the computer system has a touch-sensitive display (also known as a "touch screen" or "touchscreen display"). In some embodiments, the computer system has one or more eye-tracking components. In some embodiments, the computer system has one or more hand-tracking components. In some embodiments, the computer system has one or more output devices in addition to the display generating components, the output devices including one or more tactile output generators and / or one or more audio output devices. In some embodiments, the computer system has a graphical user interface (GUI), one or more processors, memory, and one or more modules, programs, or instruction sets stored in the memory for performing a plurality of functions. In some embodiments, a user interacts with the GUI through stylus and / or finger contacts and gestures on a touch-sensitive surface, the movement of the user's eyes and hands in space relative to the GUI (and / or computer system) or the user's body as captured by cameras and other movement sensors, and / or voice input as captured by one or more audio input devices.In some embodiments, the functions performed through the interactions optionally include image editing, drawing, presenting, word processing, spreadsheet creation, game playing, making phone calls, video conferencing, emailing, instant messaging, training support, digital photography, digital videography, web browsing, digital music playback, note taking, and / or digital video playback, and executable instructions to perform those functions are optionally contained in a transitory and / or non-transitory computer-readable storage medium or other computer program product configured to be executed by one or more processors.

[0007] There is a need for electronic devices with improved methods and interfaces for interacting with three-dimensional environments. Such methods and interfaces can complement or replace conventional methods for interacting with three-dimensional environments. Such methods and interfaces reduce the number, extent, and / or type of input from a user, creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated computing devices, such methods and interfaces conserve power and increase the time between battery charges.

[0008] In some embodiments, the computer system selectively determines and applies time settings to the individual virtual environments based on system settings, according to some embodiments. In some embodiments, the computer system updates the time settings of the virtual environment overnight based on detecting an event associated with automatic dimming, according to some embodiments. In some embodiments, the computer system displays content items in an extended display mode (e.g., full screen), according to some embodiments. In some embodiments, the computer system participates in a communication session with a second computer system while maintaining a display of the respective virtual environment, according to some embodiments. In some embodiments, the computer system selectively moves a portal into the virtual environment based on user movement, according to some embodiments. In some embodiments, the first computer system and the second computer system selectively share a virtual environment during a communication session, according to some embodiments. In some embodiments, the computer system displays media in the virtual three-dimensional environment with simulated lighting effects, according to some embodiments. In some embodiments, the computer system displays media in the virtual environment from one of a plurality of available viewpoints in the virtual environment, according to some embodiments. In some embodiments, the computer system and the second computer system initiate sharing of the virtual environment, according to some embodiments. In some embodiments, the computer system selects a position for shared content, according to some embodiments. In some embodiments, the computer system presents representations of participants in the communication session based on parameters associated with the shared content, according to some embodiments. In some embodiments, the computer system presents a user interface for controlling the visual appearance of a three-dimensional environment including the media content, according to some embodiments. In some embodiments, the computer system changes the visual appearance of the three-dimensional environment according to an environment mode, according to some embodiments.

[0009] It should be noted that the various embodiments described above can be combined with any other embodiment described herein. The features and advantages described herein are not exhaustive, and many additional features and advantages will become apparent to those skilled in the art, particularly in light of the drawings, specification, and claims. Furthermore, it should be noted that the language used in this specification has been selected solely for the purposes of readability and explanation, and not to define or limit the subject matter of the present invention. [Brief explanation of the drawings]

[0010] For a better understanding of the various described embodiments, reference should be made to the following Detailed Description of the Invention in conjunction with the following drawings, in which like reference numerals refer to corresponding parts throughout:

[0011] [Figure 1A] FIG. 1 is a block diagram illustrating an operating environment for a computer system for providing an XR experience, according to some embodiments.

[0012] [Figure 1B] 1B is an example of a computer system for providing an XR experience in the operating environment of FIG. 1A. [Figure 1C] 1B is an example of a computer system for providing an XR experience in the operating environment of FIG. 1A. [Figure 1D] 1B is an example of a computer system for providing an XR experience in the operating environment of FIG. 1A. [Figure 1E] 1B is an example of a computer system for providing an XR experience in the operating environment of FIG. 1A. [Figure 1F] 1B is an example of a computer system for providing an XR experience in the operating environment of FIG. 1A. [Figure 1G] 1B is an example of a computer system for providing an XR experience in the operating environment of FIG. 1A. [Figure 1H] 1B is an example of a computer system for providing an XR experience in the operating environment of FIG. 1A. [Figure 1I] 1B is an example of a computer system for providing an XR experience in the operating environment of FIG. 1A. [Figure 1J] 1B is an example of a computer system for providing an XR experience in the operating environment of FIG. 1A. [Figure 1K] 1B is an example of a computer system for providing an XR experience in the operating environment of FIG. 1A. [Figure 1L] 1B is an example of a computer system for providing an XR experience in the operating environment of FIG. 1A. [Figure 1M] 1B is an example of a computer system for providing an XR experience in the operating environment of FIG. 1A. [Figure 1N] 1B is an example of a computer system for providing an XR experience in the operating environment of FIG. 1A. [Figure 1O] 1B is an example of a computer system for providing an XR experience in the operating environment of FIG. 1A. [Figure 1P] 1B is an example of a computer system for providing an XR experience in the operating environment of FIG. 1A.

[0013] [Figure 2] FIG. 1 is a block diagram illustrating a controller of a computer system configured to manage and coordinate an XR experience for a user, according to some embodiments.

[0014] [Figure 3] FIG. 1 is a block diagram illustrating display generation components of a computer system configured to provide a user with visual components of an XR experience, according to some embodiments.

[0015] [Figure 4] FIG. 1 is a block diagram illustrating a hand tracking unit of a computer system configured to capture a user's gesture input, according to some embodiments.

[0016] [Figure 5] FIG. 1 is a block diagram illustrating an eye-tracking unit of a computer system configured to capture a user's gaze input, according to some embodiments.

[0017] [Figure 6] FIG. 1 is a flow diagram illustrating a glint-assisted gaze tracking pipeline, according to some embodiments.

[0018] [Figure 7A] 1 illustrates an example computer system that selectively determines and applies time settings to individual virtual environments based on system settings, according to some embodiments. [Figure 7A1] 1 illustrates an example computer system that selectively determines and applies time settings to individual virtual environments based on system settings, according to some embodiments. [Figure 7B] 1 illustrates an example computer system that selectively determines and applies time settings to individual virtual environments based on system settings, according to some embodiments. [Figure 7C] 1 illustrates an example computer system that selectively determines and applies time settings to individual virtual environments based on system settings, according to some embodiments. [Figure 7D] 1 illustrates an example computer system that selectively determines and applies time settings to individual virtual environments based on system settings, according to some embodiments. [Figure 7E] 1 illustrates an example computer system that selectively determines and applies time settings to individual virtual environments based on system settings, according to some embodiments. [Figure 7F] 1 illustrates an example computer system that selectively determines and applies time settings to individual virtual environments based on system settings, according to some embodiments.

[0019] [Figure 8A] 1 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary method for selectively determining and applying time settings to individual virtual environments based on system settings, according to some embodiments. [Figure 8B] 1 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary method for selectively determining and applying time settings to individual virtual environments based on system settings, according to some embodiments. [Figure 8C] 1 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary method for selectively determining and applying time settings to individual virtual environments based on system settings, according to some embodiments. [Figure 8D] 1 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary method for selectively determining and applying time settings to individual virtual environments based on system settings, according to some embodiments. [Figure 8E] 1 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary method for selectively determining and applying time settings to individual virtual environments based on system settings, according to some embodiments. [Figure 8F] 1 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary method for selectively determining and applying time settings to individual virtual environments based on system settings, according to some embodiments. [Figure 8G] 1 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary method for selectively determining and applying time settings to individual virtual environments based on system settings, according to some embodiments. [Figure 8H] 1 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary method for selectively determining and applying time settings to individual virtual environments based on system settings, according to some embodiments. [Figure 8I] 1 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary method for selectively determining and applying time settings to individual virtual environments based on system settings, according to some embodiments. [Figure 8J] 1 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary method for selectively determining and applying time settings to individual virtual environments based on system settings, according to some embodiments. [Figure 8K] 1 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary method for selectively determining and applying time settings to individual virtual environments based on system settings, according to some embodiments.

[0020] [Figure 9A] 1 illustrates an example computer system that updates the time settings of a virtual environment overnight based on detecting an event associated with automatic dimming, according to some embodiments. [Figure 9A1] 1 illustrates an example computer system that updates the time settings of a virtual environment overnight based on detecting an event associated with automatic dimming, according to some embodiments. [Figure 9B] 1 illustrates an example computer system that updates the time settings of a virtual environment overnight based on detecting an event associated with automatic dimming, according to some embodiments. [Figure 9C] 1 illustrates an example computer system that updates the time settings of a virtual environment overnight based on detecting an event associated with automatic dimming, according to some embodiments. [Figure 9D] 1 illustrates an example computer system that updates the time settings of a virtual environment overnight based on detecting an event associated with automatic dimming, according to some embodiments. [Figure 9E] 1 illustrates an example computer system that updates the time settings of a virtual environment overnight based on detecting an event associated with automatic dimming, according to some embodiments. [Figure 9F] 1 illustrates an example computer system that updates the time settings of a virtual environment overnight based on detecting an event associated with automatic dimming, according to some embodiments.

[0021] [Figure 10A] 10 is a flowchart illustrating a method for updating the time setting of a virtual environment overnight based on detecting an event associated with automatic dimming, according to some embodiments. [Figure 10B] 10 is a flowchart illustrating a method for updating the time setting of a virtual environment overnight based on detecting an event associated with automatic dimming, according to some embodiments. [Figure 10C]10 is a flowchart illustrating a method for updating the time setting of a virtual environment overnight based on detecting an event associated with automatic dimming, according to some embodiments. [Figure 10D] 10 is a flowchart illustrating a method for updating the time setting of a virtual environment overnight based on detecting an event associated with automatic dimming, according to some embodiments. [Figure 10E] 10 is a flowchart illustrating a method for updating the time setting of a virtual environment overnight based on detecting an event associated with automatic dimming, according to some embodiments. [Figure 10F] 10 is a flowchart illustrating a method for updating the time setting of a virtual environment overnight based on detecting an event associated with automatic dimming, according to some embodiments. [Figure 10G] 10 is a flowchart illustrating a method for updating the time setting of a virtual environment overnight based on detecting an event associated with automatic dimming, according to some embodiments. [Figure 10H] 10 is a flowchart illustrating a method for updating the time setting of a virtual environment overnight based on detecting an event associated with automatic dimming, according to some embodiments.

[0022] [Figure 11A] 1 illustrates an example computer system displaying a content item in an extended display mode (eg, full screen) according to some embodiments. [Figure 11A1] 1 illustrates an example computer system displaying a content item in an extended display mode (eg, full screen) according to some embodiments. [Figure 11B] 1 illustrates an example computer system displaying a content item in an extended display mode (eg, full screen) according to some embodiments. [Figure 11C] 1 illustrates an example computer system displaying a content item in an extended display mode (eg, full screen) according to some embodiments. [Figure 11D] 1 illustrates an example computer system displaying a content item in an extended display mode (eg, full screen) according to some embodiments. [Figure 11E] 1 illustrates an example computer system displaying a content item in an extended display mode (eg, full screen) according to some embodiments. [Figure 11F] 1 illustrates an example computer system displaying a content item in an extended display mode (eg, full screen) according to some embodiments. [Figure 11G] 1 illustrates an example computer system displaying a content item in an extended display mode (eg, full screen) according to some embodiments. [Figure 11H] 1 illustrates an example computer system displaying a content item in an extended display mode (eg, full screen) according to some embodiments. [Figure 11I] 1 illustrates an example computer system displaying a content item in an extended display mode (eg, full screen) according to some embodiments.

[0023] [Figure 12A] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for displaying a content item in an extended display mode (e.g., full screen) according to some embodiments. [Figure 12B] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for displaying a content item in an extended display mode (e.g., full screen) according to some embodiments. [Figure 12C] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for displaying a content item in an extended display mode (e.g., full screen) according to some embodiments. [Figure 12D] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for displaying a content item in an extended display mode (e.g., full screen) according to some embodiments. [Figure 12E]1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for displaying a content item in an extended display mode (e.g., full screen) according to some embodiments.

[0024] [Figure 13A] 1 illustrates an example of a first computer system participating in a communications session with a second computer system while maintaining a display of the respective virtual environments, according to some embodiments. [Figure 13B] 1 illustrates an example of a first computer system participating in a communications session with a second computer system while maintaining a display of the respective virtual environments, according to some embodiments. [Figure 13A1] 1 illustrates an example of a first computer system participating in a communications session with a second computer system while maintaining a display of the respective virtual environments, according to some embodiments. [Figure 13B1] 1 illustrates an example of a first computer system participating in a communications session with a second computer system while maintaining a display of the respective virtual environments, according to some embodiments. [Figure 13C] 1 illustrates an example of a first computer system participating in a communications session with a second computer system while maintaining a display of the respective virtual environments, according to some embodiments. [Figure 13D] 1 illustrates an example of a first computer system participating in a communications session with a second computer system while maintaining a display of the respective virtual environments, according to some embodiments. [Figure 13E] 1 illustrates an example of a first computer system participating in a communications session with a second computer system while maintaining a display of the respective virtual environments, according to some embodiments. [Figure 13F] 1 illustrates an example of a first computer system participating in a communications session with a second computer system while maintaining a display of the respective virtual environments, according to some embodiments. [Figure 13G]1 illustrates an example of a first computer system participating in a communications session with a second computer system while maintaining a display of the respective virtual environments, according to some embodiments. [Figure 13H] 1 illustrates an example of a first computer system participating in a communications session with a second computer system while maintaining a display of the respective virtual environments, according to some embodiments.

[0025] [Figure 14A] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for joining a communication session with a second computer system while maintaining a display of the respective virtual environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 14B] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for joining a communication session with a second computer system while maintaining a display of the respective virtual environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 14C] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for joining a communication session with a second computer system while maintaining a display of the respective virtual environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 14D] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for joining a communication session with a second computer system while maintaining a display of the respective virtual environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 14E] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for joining a communication session with a second computer system while maintaining a display of the respective virtual environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 14F] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for joining a communication session with a second computer system while maintaining a display of the respective virtual environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 14G] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for joining a communication session with a second computer system while maintaining a display of the respective virtual environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 14H]1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for joining a communication session with a second computer system while maintaining a display of the respective virtual environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 14I] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for joining a communication session with a second computer system while maintaining a display of the respective virtual environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 14J] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for joining a communication session with a second computer system while maintaining a display of the respective virtual environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 14K] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for joining a communication session with a second computer system while maintaining a display of the respective virtual environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 14L] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for joining a communication session with a second computer system while maintaining a display of the respective virtual environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 14M] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for joining a communication session with a second computer system while maintaining a display of the respective virtual environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 14N] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for joining a communication session with a second computer system while maintaining a display of the respective virtual environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 14O] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for joining a communication session with a second computer system while maintaining a display of the respective virtual environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 14P] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for joining a communication session with a second computer system while maintaining a display of the respective virtual environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 14Q]1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for joining a communication session with a second computer system while maintaining a display of the respective virtual environment, according to some embodiments.

[0026] [Figure 15A] 1 illustrates an example computer system that selectively moves portals within a virtual environment based on user movement, according to some embodiments. [Figure 15A1] 1 illustrates an example computer system that selectively moves portals within a virtual environment based on user movement, according to some embodiments. [Figure 15B] 1 illustrates an example computer system that selectively moves portals within a virtual environment based on user movement, according to some embodiments. [Figure 15C] 1 illustrates an example computer system that selectively moves portals within a virtual environment based on user movement, according to some embodiments. [Figure 15D] 1 illustrates an example computer system that selectively moves portals within a virtual environment based on user movement, according to some embodiments. [Figure 15E] 1 illustrates an example computer system that selectively moves portals within a virtual environment based on user movement, according to some embodiments. [Figure 15F] 1 illustrates an example computer system that selectively moves portals within a virtual environment based on user movement, according to some embodiments. [Figure 15G] 1 illustrates an example computer system that selectively moves portals within a virtual environment based on user movement, according to some embodiments.

[0027] [Figure 16A] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for joining a communication session with a second computer system while maintaining a display of the respective virtual environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 16B]1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for joining a communication session with a second computer system while maintaining a display of the respective virtual environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 16C] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for joining a communication session with a second computer system while maintaining a display of the respective virtual environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 16D] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for joining a communication session with a second computer system while maintaining a display of the respective virtual environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 16E] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for joining a communication session with a second computer system while maintaining a display of the respective virtual environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 16F] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for joining a communication session with a second computer system while maintaining a display of the respective virtual environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 16G] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for joining a communication session with a second computer system while maintaining a display of the respective virtual environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 16H] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for joining a communication session with a second computer system while maintaining a display of the respective virtual environment, according to some embodiments.

[0028] [Figure 17A] 1 illustrates an example of a first computer system and a second computer system selectively sharing a virtual environment during a communication session, according to some embodiments. [Figure 17A1] 1 illustrates an example of a first computer system and a second computer system selectively sharing a virtual environment during a communication session, according to some embodiments. [Figure 17B]1 illustrates an example of a first computer system and a second computer system selectively sharing a virtual environment during a communication session, according to some embodiments. [Figure 17C] 1 illustrates an example of a first computer system and a second computer system selectively sharing a virtual environment during a communication session, according to some embodiments. [Figure 17D] 1 illustrates an example of a first computer system and a second computer system selectively sharing a virtual environment during a communication session, according to some embodiments. [Figure 17E] 1 illustrates an example of a first computer system and a second computer system selectively sharing a virtual environment during a communication session, according to some embodiments. [Figure 17F] 1 illustrates an example of a first computer system and a second computer system selectively sharing a virtual environment during a communication session, according to some embodiments. [Figure 17G] 1 illustrates an example of a first computer system and a second computer system selectively sharing a virtual environment during a communication session, according to some embodiments.

[0029] [Figure 18A] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for selectively sharing a virtual environment during a communication session, according to some embodiments. [Figure 18B] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for selectively sharing a virtual environment during a communication session, according to some embodiments. [Figure 18C] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for selectively sharing a virtual environment during a communication session, according to some embodiments. [Figure 18D] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for selectively sharing a virtual environment during a communication session, according to some embodiments. [Figure 18E] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for selectively sharing a virtual environment during a communication session, according to some embodiments. [Figure 18F]1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for selectively sharing a virtual environment during a communication session, according to some embodiments. [Figure 18G] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for selectively sharing a virtual environment during a communication session, according to some embodiments. [Figure 18H] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for selectively sharing a virtual environment during a communication session, according to some embodiments. [Figure 18I] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for selectively sharing a virtual environment during a communication session, according to some embodiments.

[0030] [Figure 19A] 1 illustrates an example computer system for displaying media in a virtual environment with simulated lighting effects from one of multiple available viewpoints in the virtual environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 19B] 1 illustrates an example computer system for displaying media in a virtual environment with simulated lighting effects from one of multiple available viewpoints in the virtual environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 19C] 1 illustrates an example computer system for displaying media in a virtual environment with simulated lighting effects from one of multiple available viewpoints in the virtual environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 19D] 1 illustrates an example computer system for displaying media in a virtual environment with simulated lighting effects from one of multiple available viewpoints in the virtual environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 19E] 1 illustrates an example computer system for displaying media in a virtual environment with simulated lighting effects from one of multiple available viewpoints in the virtual environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 19E1] 1 illustrates an example computer system for displaying media in a virtual environment with simulated lighting effects from one of multiple available viewpoints in the virtual environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 19F]1 illustrates an example computer system for displaying media in a virtual environment with simulated lighting effects from one of multiple available viewpoints in the virtual environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 19G] 1 illustrates an example computer system for displaying media in a virtual environment with simulated lighting effects from one of multiple available viewpoints in the virtual environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 19H] 1 illustrates an example computer system for displaying media in a virtual environment with simulated lighting effects from one of multiple available viewpoints in the virtual environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 19I] 1 illustrates an example computer system for displaying media in a virtual environment with simulated lighting effects from one of multiple available viewpoints in the virtual environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 19J] 1 illustrates an example computer system for displaying media in a virtual environment with simulated lighting effects from one of multiple available viewpoints in the virtual environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 19K] 1 illustrates an example computer system for displaying media in a virtual environment with simulated lighting effects from one of multiple available viewpoints in the virtual environment, according to some embodiments.

[0031] [Figure 20A] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for displaying media in a virtual three-dimensional environment with simulated lighting effects, according to some embodiments. [Figure 20B] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for displaying media in a virtual three-dimensional environment with simulated lighting effects, according to some embodiments. [Figure 20C] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for displaying media in a virtual three-dimensional environment with simulated lighting effects, according to some embodiments. [Figure 20D]1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for displaying media in a virtual three-dimensional environment with simulated lighting effects, according to some embodiments. [Figure 20E] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for displaying media in a virtual three-dimensional environment with simulated lighting effects, according to some embodiments. [Figure 20F] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for displaying media in a virtual three-dimensional environment with simulated lighting effects, according to some embodiments.

[0032] [Figure 21A] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for displaying media within a virtual environment from one of a plurality of available viewpoints within the virtual environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 21B] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for displaying media within a virtual environment from one of a plurality of available viewpoints within the virtual environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 21C] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for displaying media within a virtual environment from one of a plurality of available viewpoints within the virtual environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 21D] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for displaying media within a virtual environment from one of a plurality of available viewpoints within the virtual environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 21E] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for displaying media within a virtual environment from one of a plurality of available viewpoints within the virtual environment, according to some embodiments.

[0033] [Figure 22A] 1 illustrates an example computer system that facilitates sharing of a virtual three-dimensional environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 22B1] 1 illustrates an example computer system that facilitates sharing of a virtual three-dimensional environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 22B] 1 illustrates an example computer system that facilitates sharing of a virtual three-dimensional environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 22C] 1 illustrates an example computer system that facilitates sharing of a virtual three-dimensional environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 22D] 1 illustrates an example computer system that facilitates sharing of a virtual three-dimensional environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 22E] 1 illustrates an example computer system that facilitates sharing of a virtual three-dimensional environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 22F] 1 illustrates an example computer system that facilitates sharing of a virtual three-dimensional environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 22G] 1 illustrates an example computer system that facilitates sharing of a virtual three-dimensional environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 22H] 1 illustrates an example computer system that facilitates sharing of a virtual three-dimensional environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 22I] 1 illustrates an example computer system that facilitates sharing of a virtual three-dimensional environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 22J] 1 illustrates an example computer system that facilitates sharing of a virtual three-dimensional environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 22K] 1 illustrates an example computer system that facilitates sharing of a virtual three-dimensional environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 22L] 1 illustrates an example computer system that facilitates sharing of a virtual three-dimensional environment, according to some embodiments.

[0034] [Figure 23] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for facilitating sharing of a virtual three-dimensional environment, according to some embodiments.

[0035] [Figure 24A] 1 illustrates an example computer system for positioning a viewpoint of a communication session participant relative to shared content, according to some embodiments. [Figure 24B]1 illustrates an example computer system for positioning a viewpoint of a communication session participant relative to shared content, according to some embodiments. [Figure 24C] 1 illustrates an example computer system for positioning a viewpoint of a communication session participant relative to shared content, according to some embodiments. [Figure 24D] 1 illustrates an example computer system for positioning a viewpoint of a communication session participant relative to shared content, according to some embodiments. [Figure 24E] 1 illustrates an example computer system for positioning a viewpoint of a communication session participant relative to shared content, according to some embodiments. [Figure 24F] 1 illustrates an example computer system for positioning a viewpoint of a communication session participant relative to shared content, according to some embodiments. [Figure 24F1] 1 illustrates an example computer system for positioning a viewpoint of a communication session participant relative to shared content, according to some embodiments.

[0036] [Figure 25] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for positioning a viewpoint of a communication session participant relative to shared content, according to some embodiments.

[0037] [Figure 26A] 1 illustrates an example computer system that presents representations of participants in a real-time communication session based on parameters associated with shared content, according to some embodiments. [Figure 26A1] 1 illustrates an example computer system that presents representations of participants in a real-time communication session based on parameters associated with shared content, according to some embodiments. [Figure 26B] 1 illustrates an example computer system that presents representations of participants in a real-time communication session based on parameters associated with shared content, according to some embodiments. [Figure 26C]1 illustrates an example computer system that presents representations of participants in a real-time communication session based on parameters associated with shared content, according to some embodiments. [Figure 26D] 1 illustrates an example computer system that presents representations of participants in a real-time communication session based on parameters associated with shared content, according to some embodiments. [Figure 26E] 1 illustrates an example computer system that presents representations of participants in a real-time communication session based on parameters associated with shared content, according to some embodiments. [Figure 26F] 1 illustrates an example computer system that presents representations of participants in a real-time communication session based on parameters associated with shared content, according to some embodiments. [Figure 26G] 1 illustrates an example computer system that presents representations of participants in a real-time communication session based on parameters associated with shared content, according to some embodiments.

[0038] [Figure 27] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for presenting representations of participants in a real-time communication session based on parameters associated with shared content, according to some embodiments.

[0039] [Figure 28A] 1 illustrates an example computer system that presents a user interface and controls associated with media content displayed in a three-dimensional environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 28A1] 1 illustrates an example computer system that presents a user interface and controls associated with media content displayed in a three-dimensional environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 28B]1 illustrates an example computer system that presents a user interface and controls associated with media content displayed in a three-dimensional environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 28C] 1 illustrates an example computer system that presents a user interface and controls associated with media content displayed in a three-dimensional environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 28D] 1 illustrates an example computer system that presents a user interface and controls associated with media content displayed in a three-dimensional environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 28E] 1 illustrates an example computer system that presents a user interface and controls associated with media content displayed in a three-dimensional environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 28F] 1 illustrates an example computer system that presents a user interface and controls associated with media content displayed in a three-dimensional environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 28G] 1 illustrates an example computer system that presents a user interface and controls associated with media content displayed in a three-dimensional environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 28H] 1 illustrates an example computer system that presents a user interface and controls associated with media content displayed in a three-dimensional environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 28I] 1 illustrates an example computer system that presents a user interface and controls associated with media content displayed in a three-dimensional environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 28J] 1 illustrates an example computer system that presents a user interface and controls associated with media content displayed in a three-dimensional environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 28K]1 illustrates an example computer system that presents a user interface and controls associated with media content displayed in a three-dimensional environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 28L] 1 illustrates an example computer system that presents a user interface and controls associated with media content displayed in a three-dimensional environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 28M] 1 illustrates an example computer system that presents a user interface and controls associated with media content displayed in a three-dimensional environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 28N] 1 illustrates an example computer system that presents a user interface and controls associated with media content displayed in a three-dimensional environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 28O] 1 illustrates an example computer system that presents a user interface and controls associated with media content displayed in a three-dimensional environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 28P] 1 illustrates an example computer system that presents a user interface and controls associated with media content displayed in a three-dimensional environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 28Q] 1 illustrates an example computer system that presents a user interface and controls associated with media content displayed in a three-dimensional environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 28R] 1 illustrates an example computer system that presents a user interface and controls associated with media content displayed in a three-dimensional environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 28S] 1 illustrates an example computer system that presents a user interface and controls associated with media content displayed in a three-dimensional environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 28T]1 illustrates an example computer system that presents a user interface and controls associated with media content displayed in a three-dimensional environment, according to some embodiments. [Figure 28U] 1 illustrates an example computer system that presents a user interface and controls associated with media content displayed in a three-dimensional environment, according to some embodiments.

[0040] [Figure 29] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for presenting a user interface and controls associated with media content displayed within a three-dimensional environment, according to some embodiments.

[0041] [Figure 30A] 1 illustrates an example computer system that changes the visual appearance of a three-dimensional environment according to an environmental mode associated with media content, according to some embodiments. [Figure 30B] 1 illustrates an example computer system that changes the visual appearance of a three-dimensional environment according to an environmental mode associated with media content, according to some embodiments. [Figure 30B-1] 1 illustrates an example computer system that changes the visual appearance of a three-dimensional environment according to an environmental mode associated with media content, according to some embodiments. [Figure 30B-2] 1 illustrates an example computer system that changes the visual appearance of a three-dimensional environment according to an environmental mode associated with media content, according to some embodiments. [Figure 30C] 1 illustrates an example computer system that changes the visual appearance of a three-dimensional environment according to an environmental mode associated with media content, according to some embodiments. [Figure 30D] 1 illustrates an example computer system that changes the visual appearance of a three-dimensional environment according to an environmental mode associated with media content, according to some embodiments. [Figure 30E]1 illustrates an example computer system that changes the visual appearance of a three-dimensional environment according to an environmental mode associated with media content, according to some embodiments. [Figure 30F] 1 illustrates an example computer system that changes the visual appearance of a three-dimensional environment according to an environmental mode associated with media content, according to some embodiments. [Figure 30F-1] 1 illustrates an example computer system that changes the visual appearance of a three-dimensional environment according to an environmental mode associated with media content, according to some embodiments. [Figure 30G] 1 illustrates an example computer system that changes the visual appearance of a three-dimensional environment according to an environmental mode associated with media content, according to some embodiments. [Figure 30G1] 1 illustrates an example computer system that changes the visual appearance of a three-dimensional environment according to an environmental mode associated with media content, according to some embodiments. [Figure 30H] 1 illustrates an example computer system that changes the visual appearance of a three-dimensional environment according to an environmental mode associated with media content, according to some embodiments. [Figure 30I] 1 illustrates an example computer system that changes the visual appearance of a three-dimensional environment according to an environmental mode associated with media content, according to some embodiments. [Figure 30J] 1 illustrates an example computer system that changes the visual appearance of a three-dimensional environment according to an environmental mode associated with media content, according to some embodiments. [Figure 30K] 1 illustrates an example computer system that changes the visual appearance of a three-dimensional environment according to an environmental mode associated with media content, according to some embodiments. [Figure 30L] 1 illustrates an example computer system that changes the visual appearance of a three-dimensional environment according to an environmental mode associated with media content, according to some embodiments. [Figure 30M]1 illustrates an example computer system that changes the visual appearance of a three-dimensional environment according to an environmental mode associated with media content, according to some embodiments. [Figure 30N] 1 illustrates an example computer system that changes the visual appearance of a three-dimensional environment according to an environmental mode associated with media content, according to some embodiments. [Figure 30O] 1 illustrates an example computer system that changes the visual appearance of a three-dimensional environment according to an environmental mode associated with media content, according to some embodiments.

[0042] [Figure 31] 1 is a flowchart illustrating a method for modifying the visual appearance of a three-dimensional environment according to an environmental mode associated with media content, according to some embodiments. DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

[0043] The present disclosure relates to a user interface that provides an extended reality (XR) experience to a user, according to some embodiments.

[0044] The systems, methods, and GUIs described herein improve user interface interaction with virtual / augmented reality environments in several ways.

[0045] In some embodiments, the computer system selectively determines and applies time settings to the individual virtual environments based on system settings, according to some embodiments. In some embodiments, the computer system updates the time settings of the virtual environment overnight based on detecting an event associated with automatic dimming, according to some embodiments. In some embodiments, the computer system displays content items in an extended display mode (e.g., full screen), according to some embodiments. In some embodiments, the computer system participates in a communication session with a second computer system while maintaining a display of the respective virtual environment, according to some embodiments. In some embodiments, the computer system selectively moves a portal into the virtual environment based on user movement, according to some embodiments. In some embodiments, the first computer system and the second computer system selectively share a virtual environment during a communication session, according to some embodiments. In some embodiments, the computer system displays media in the virtual three-dimensional environment with simulated lighting effects, according to some embodiments. In some embodiments, the computer system displays media in the virtual environment from one of a plurality of available viewpoints in the virtual environment, according to some embodiments. In some embodiments, the computer system and the second computer system initiate sharing of the virtual environment, according to some embodiments. In some embodiments, the computer system selects a position for shared content, according to some embodiments. In some embodiments, the computer system presents representations of participants in the communication session based on parameters associated with the shared content, according to some embodiments. In some embodiments, the computer system presents a user interface for controlling the visual appearance of a three-dimensional environment including the media content, according to some embodiments. In some embodiments, the computer system changes the visual appearance of the three-dimensional environment according to an environment mode, according to some embodiments.

[0046] 1A-6 provide a description of an exemplary computer system for providing an XR experience to a user (such as described below with respect to methods 800, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, 1800, 2000, 2100, 2300, 2500, 2700, 2900, and / or 3100). FIGS. 7A-7F illustrate an example computer system that selectively determines and applies time settings to an individual virtual environment based on system settings, according to some embodiments. FIGS. 8A-8K are flowcharts illustrating an exemplary method for selectively determining and applying time settings to an individual virtual environment based on system settings, according to some embodiments. The user interfaces of FIGS. 7A-7F are used to illustrate the process of FIGS. 8A-8K. FIGS. 9A-9F illustrate an example computer system that updates a virtual environment's time settings overnight based on detecting an event associated with automatic dimming, according to some embodiments. 10A-10H are flow charts illustrating a method for updating a virtual environment's time-of-day setting at night based on detecting an event associated with automatic dimming, according to some embodiments. The user interfaces of FIGS. 9A-9F are used to illustrate the process of FIGS. 10A-10H. FIGS. 11A-11I illustrate an exemplary technique for displaying a content item in an extended display mode (e.g., full screen) according to some embodiments. FIGS. 12A-12E are flow diagrams of a method for displaying a content item in an extended display mode (e.g., full screen) according to various embodiments. The user interfaces of FIGS. 11A-11I are used to illustrate the process of FIGS. 12A-12E. FIGS. 13A-13H illustrate an exemplary technique for joining a communication session with a second computer system while maintaining a display of the respective virtual environment, according to some embodiments. FIGS. 14A-14Q are flow diagrams of a method for joining a communication session with a second computer system while maintaining a display of the respective virtual environment, according to various embodiments. The user interfaces of Figures 13A-13H are used to illustrate the processes of Figures 14A-14Q.FIGS. 15A-15G illustrate an exemplary technique for selectively moving a portal into a virtual environment based on a user's movement, according to some embodiments. FIGS. 16A-16H are a flow diagram of a method for selectively moving a portal into a virtual environment based on a user's movement, according to various embodiments. The user interfaces of FIGS. 15A-15G are used to illustrate the process of FIGS. 16A-16H. FIGS. 17A-17G illustrate an exemplary technique for selectively sharing a virtual environment during a communication session, according to some embodiments. FIGS. 18A-18I are a flow diagram of a method for selectively sharing a virtual environment during a communication session, according to various embodiments. The user interfaces of FIGS. 17A-17G are used to illustrate the process of FIGS. 18A-18I. FIGS. 19A-19K illustrate an example computer system for displaying media in a virtual environment with simulated lighting effects from one of multiple available viewpoints in the virtual environment, according to some embodiments. FIGS. 20A-20F are a flowchart illustrating a method for displaying media in a virtual three-dimensional environment with simulated lighting effects, according to some embodiments. The user interfaces of Figures 19A-19K are used to illustrate the process of Figures 20A-20F. Figures 21A-21E are flowcharts illustrating a method for displaying media in a virtual environment from one of multiple available viewpoints in the virtual environment, according to some embodiments. The user interfaces of Figures 19A-19K are used to illustrate the process of Figures 21A-21E. Figures 22A-22L show an example of a computer system that facilitates sharing of a virtual three-dimensional environment, according to some embodiments. Figure 23 is a flowchart showing a method for facilitating sharing of a virtual three-dimensional environment, according to some embodiments. The user interfaces of Figures 22A-22L are used to illustrate the process of Figure 23. Figures 24A-24F1 show an example of a computer system that facilitates sharing of a virtual three-dimensional environment, according to some embodiments. Figure 25 is a flowchart showing a method 2500 for facilitating sharing of a virtual three-dimensional environment, according to some embodiments. The user interfaces of Figures 24A-24F1 are used to illustrate the process of Figure 25.

[0013] Figures 26A-26G show an example computer system that presents representations of participants in a real-time communication session based on parameters associated with shared content, according to some embodiments. Figure 27 is a flowchart illustrating a method for facilitating sharing of a virtual three-dimensional environment, according to some embodiments. The user interfaces of Figures 26A-26G are used to explain the process of Figure 27. Figures 28A-28U show an example computer system that presents user interfaces and controls associated with media content displayed in a three-dimensional environment, according to some embodiments. Figure 29 is a flowchart illustrating a method for presenting user interfaces and controls associated with media content displayed in a three-dimensional environment, according to some embodiments. The user interfaces of Figures 28A-28U are used to illustrate the process of Figure 29. Figures 30A-30O show an example computer system that alters the visual appearance of a three-dimensional environment according to an environmental mode associated with media content, according to some embodiments. Figure 31 is a flowchart illustrating a method for altering the visual appearance of a three-dimensional environment according to an environmental mode associated with media content, according to some embodiments. The user interfaces of Figures 30A-30O are used to illustrate the process of Figure 31.

[0047] The processes described below enhance device usability and make user-device interfaces more efficient (e.g., by helping users provide appropriate inputs and reducing user errors when operating / interacting with the device) through various techniques, including providing improved visual feedback to the user, reducing the number of inputs required to perform an action, providing additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional controls, performing an action without requiring further user input when a set of conditions is met, improving privacy and / or security, providing a more diverse, detailed, and / or realistic user experience while saving storage space, and / or additional techniques. These techniques also reduce power usage and improve device battery life by allowing users to use the device more quickly and efficiently. Saving battery power, and therefore weight, improves device ergonomics. These techniques also enable real-time communication and the use of fewer and / or less accurate sensors, resulting in more compact, lighter, and less expensive devices, and allowing devices to be used in a variety of lighting conditions. These techniques reduce energy use and thereby reduce the heat given off by the device, which is particularly important for wearable devices where a device that is well within the operating parameters for the device components may become uncomfortable for the user to wear if it is generating too much heat.

[0048] Furthermore, for methods described herein in which one or more steps are conditioned on one or more conditions being satisfied, it should be understood that the described method can be repeated in multiple iterations, such that over the course of the iterations, all of the conditions on which the method steps are conditioned are satisfied in different iterations of the method. For example, if a method requires performing a first step if a condition is satisfied and a second step if the condition is not satisfied, one skilled in the art will understand that the steps recited in the claim are repeated in a particular order until the conditions are satisfied and then no longer satisfied. Thus, a method described with one or more steps that depend on one or more conditions being satisfied can be rewritten as a method that is repeated until each condition recited in the method is satisfied. However, this is not required for system or computer-readable medium claims in which the system or computer-readable medium includes instructions for performing a conditional action based on the satisfaction of the corresponding one or more conditions, and thus can determine whether a contingency is met without explicitly repeating the method steps until all conditions on which the method steps are conditioned are satisfied. Those skilled in the art will also understand that, as with methods having conditional steps, the system or computer-readable storage medium may repeat the steps of the method as many times as necessary to ensure that all of the conditional steps have been performed.

[0049] 1A , an XR experience is provided to a user via an operating environment 100 that includes a computer system 101. The computer system 101 includes a controller 110 (e.g., a processor of a portable electronic device or a remote server), a display generation component 120 (e.g., a head-mounted device (HMD), a display, a projector, a touchscreen, etc.), one or more input devices 125 (e.g., an eye-tracking device 130, a hand-tracking device 140, other input devices 150), one or more output devices 155 (e.g., a speaker 160, a tactile output generator 170, and other output devices 180), one or more sensors 190 (e.g., an image sensor, a light sensor, a depth sensor, a tactile sensor, an orientation sensor, a proximity sensor, a temperature sensor, a location sensor, a motion sensor, a speed sensor, etc.), and optionally one or more peripheral devices 195 (e.g., a consumer electronics device, a wearable device, etc.). In some embodiments, one or more of input device 125, output device 155, sensor 190, and peripheral device 195 are integrated with display generation component 120 (e.g., within a head-mounted or handheld device).

[0050] When describing an XR experience, various terms are used to individually refer to several related, but distinct, environments that a user can sense and / or interact with (e.g., using inputs detected by the computer system 101 generating the XR experience that cause the computer system generating the XR experience to generate audio, visual, and / or haptic feedback corresponding to various inputs provided to the computer system 101). The following is a subset of these terms:

[0051] Physical Environment: The physical environment refers to the physical world that people can sense and / or interact with without the aid of electronic systems. A physical environment, such as a physical park, includes physical objects such as physical trees, physical buildings, and physical people. People can directly sense and / or interact with the physical environment through their senses, such as sight, touch, hearing, taste, and smell.

[0052] Extended reality: In contrast, an extended reality (XR) environment refers to a wholly or partially simulated environment that people sense and / or interact with through electronic systems. In XR, a subset of a person's physical movements or representations thereof are tracked, and one or more properties of one or more simulated virtual objects within the XR environment are adjusted accordingly to behave with at least one law of physics. For example, an XR system may detect the rotation of a person's head and adjust the graphical content and sound field presented to the person accordingly, in a manner similar to how such views and sounds change in a physical environment. In some situations (e.g., for accessibility reasons), adjustments to the property(ies) of a virtual object(s) within an XR environment may be made in response to the representation of a physical movement (e.g., a voice command). A person may sense and / or interact with an XR object using any one of their senses, including sight, sound, touch, taste, and smell. For example, a person may sense and / or interact with audio objects that create a 3D or spatial audio environment that provides the perception of a point audio source in 3D space. In another example, audio objects may enable audio transparency that selectively incorporates ambient sounds from the physical environment, with or without computer-generated audio. In some XR environments, a person may sense and / or interact with only audio objects.

[0053] Examples of XR include virtual reality and mixed reality.

[0054] Virtual Reality: A virtual reality (VR) environment refers to a simulated environment designed to be based entirely on computer-generated sensory input for one or more senses. A VR environment includes multiple virtual objects that a person can sense and / or interact with. For example, computer-generated images of trees, buildings, and avatars representing people are examples of virtual objects. A person can sense and / or interact with virtual objects in a VR environment through a simulation of the person's presence in the computer-generated environment and / or through a simulation of a subset of the person's physical movement within the computer-generated environment.

[0055] Mixed reality: A mixed reality (MR) environment refers to a simulated environment designed to incorporate sensory input from or representations of a physical environment in addition to including computer-generated sensory input (e.g., virtual objects), as opposed to a VR environment designed to be based entirely on computer-generated sensory input. On a virtual continuum, a mixed reality environment is anywhere between, but not including, a complete physical environment at one end and a virtual reality environment at the other. In some MR environments, computer-generated sensory input may respond to changes in sensory input from the physical environment. Some electronic systems for presenting MR environments may also track location and / or orientation relative to the physical environment to allow virtual objects to interact with real objects (i.e., physical items from the physical environment or representations thereof). For example, the system may take into account movement so that a virtual tree appears stationary relative to the physical ground.

[0056] Examples of mixed reality include extended reality and augmented virtuality.

[0057] Extended Reality: An augmented reality (AR) environment refers to a simulated environment in which one or more virtual objects are superimposed on a physical environment or a representation thereof. For example, an electronic system for presenting an AR environment may have a transparent or translucent display through which a person can directly view the physical environment. The system may be configured to present virtual objects on the transparent or translucent display, whereby a person using the system perceives the virtual objects superimposed on the physical environment. Alternatively, the system may have an opaque display and one or more imaging sensors that capture images or videos of the physical environment that are representations of the physical environment. The system composites the images or videos with the virtual objects and presents the composite on the opaque display. The person uses the system to indirectly view the physical environment through the images or videos of the physical environment and perceive the virtual objects superimposed on the physical environment. As used herein, video of a physical environment shown on an opaque display is referred to as "pass-through video," meaning that the system captures images of the physical environment using one or more image sensors and uses those images in presenting the AR environment on the opaque display. Alternatively, the system may include a projection system that projects virtual objects, e.g., as holograms, into the physical environment or onto a physical surface, such that a person using the system perceives the virtual objects superimposed on the physical environment. An extended reality environment also refers to a simulated environment in which a representation of the physical environment is transformed by computer-generated sensory information. For example, in providing pass-through video, the system may distort one or more sensor images to impose a selected perspective (e.g., viewpoint) other than the perspective captured by the imaging sensor. As another example, the representation of the physical environment may be distorted by graphically modifying (e.g., enlarging) a portion thereof, such that the modified portion becomes a non-photorealistic, altered version that represents the originally captured image.As a further example, the representation of the physical environment may be altered by graphically removing or obscuring portions of it.

[0058] Augmented Virtuality: An augmented virtuality (AV) environment refers to a simulated environment in which a virtual or computer-generated environment incorporates one or more sensory inputs from a physical environment. The sensory inputs may be representations of one or more characteristics of the physical environment. For example, an AV park may have virtual trees and virtual buildings, while people with faces are realistically recreated from images taken of physical people. As another example, virtual objects may adopt the shape or color of physical items imaged by one or more imaging sensors. As a further example, virtual objects may adopt shadows that match the position of the sun in the physical environment.

[0059] In an augmented reality, mixed reality, or virtual reality environment, a view of a three-dimensional environment is visible to a user. The view of the three-dimensional environment is typically visible to a user via one or more display generating components (e.g., a display or pair of display modules providing stereoscopic content to different eyes of the same user) through a virtual viewport having a viewport boundary that defines the extent of the three-dimensional environment visible to the user via the one or more display generating components. In some embodiments, the area defined by the viewport boundary is smaller in one or more dimensions than the user's field of view (e.g., based on the user's field of view, the size, optical properties, or other physical characteristics of the one or more display generating components, and / or the location and / or orientation of the one or more display generating components relative to the user's eyes). In some embodiments, the area defined by the viewport boundary is larger in one or more dimensions than the user's field of view (e.g., based on the user's field of view, the size, optical properties, or other physical characteristics of the one or more display generating components, and / or the location and / or orientation of the one or more display generating components relative to the user's eyes). The viewport and viewport boundaries typically move as one or more display-generating components move (e.g., with the user's head in the case of a head-mounted device, or with the user's hands in the case of a handheld device such as a tablet or smartphone). The user's viewpoint determines what content is visible within the viewport; the viewpoint generally specifies a location and orientation relative to the three-dimensional environment; as the viewpoint shifts, the view of the three-dimensional environment also shifts within the viewport. In the case of a head-mounted device, the viewpoint is typically based on the location and orientation of the user's head, face, and / or eyes to provide a view of the three-dimensional environment that is perceptually accurate and provides an immersive experience when the user is using the head-mounted device.In the case of a handheld or stationary device, the viewpoint shifts as the handheld or stationary device is moved and / or as the user's position relative to the handheld or stationary device changes (e.g., as the user moves toward, away from, above, below, to the right of, and / or to the left of the device). In a device that includes a display generation component with virtual pass-through, the portion of the physical environment that is visible (e.g., displayed and / or projected) through one or more display generation components typically moves with the display generation components (e.g., moves with the user's head in a head-mounted device, or moves with the user's hand in a handheld device such as a tablet or smartphone) as the user's viewpoint moves as the field of view of one or more cameras moves (and the appearance of one or more virtual objects displayed through the one or more display generation components is updated based on the user's viewpoint (e.g., the displayed position and pose of the virtual objects are updated based on the movement of the user's viewpoint). In the case of display generating components that have an optical pass-through, the portion of the physical environment that is visible through one or more display generating components (e.g., optically visible through one or more partially or fully transparent portions of the display generating components) is based on the user's view through the partially or fully transparent portions of the display generating components (e.g., moves with the user's head in the case of a head-mounted device, or moves with the user's hand in the case of a handheld device such as a tablet or smartphone), such that the user's viewpoint moves (and the appearance of the one or more virtual objects is updated based on the user's viewpoint) as the user's viewpoint moves through the partially or fully transparent portion(s) of the display generating components.

[0060] In some embodiments, a representation of the physical environment (e.g., displayed via a virtual or optical pass-through) can be partially or completely obscured by the virtual environment. In some embodiments, the amount of the virtual environment that is displayed (e.g., the amount of the physical environment that is not displayed) is based on the immersion level of the virtual environment (e.g., relative to the representation of the physical environment). For example, increasing the immersion level optionally causes more of the virtual environment to be displayed, replacing and / or obscuring more of the physical environment, and decreasing the immersion level optionally causes less of the virtual environment to be displayed, revealing portions of the physical environment that were not previously displayed and / or obscured. In some embodiments, at a particular immersion level, one or more first background objects (e.g., in the representation of the physical environment) are visually less highlighted (e.g., dimmed, blurred, and / or displayed with increased transparency) than one or more second background objects, and one or more third background objects are discontinued. In some embodiments, the immersion level includes the relative extent to which the virtual content (e.g., the virtual environment and / or virtual content) displayed by the computer system obscures background content (e.g., content other than the virtual environment and / or virtual content) around / behind the virtual content, and optionally includes the number of items of background content displayed and / or the visual characteristics (e.g., color, contrast, and / or opacity) with which the background content is displayed, the angular range of the virtual content displayed via the display generating components (e.g., 60-degree content displayed at low immersion, 120-degree content displayed at medium immersion, or 180-degree content displayed at high immersion), and / or the percentage of the field of view displayed via the display generating components that is consumed by the virtual content (e.g., 33% of the field of view consumed by the virtual content at low immersion, 66% of the field of view consumed by the virtual content at medium immersion, or 100% of the field of view consumed by the virtual content at high immersion). In some embodiments, the background content is included in the background against which the virtual content is displayed (e.g., background content within a representation of the physical environment).In some embodiments, background content includes user interfaces (e.g., user interfaces generated by a computer system corresponding to an application), virtual objects (e.g., files or representations of other users generated by a computer system) that are not associated with or included in the virtual environment and / or virtual content, and / or real objects (e.g., pass-through objects that represent real objects in the physical environment around the user that are visible as displayed through the display generating components and / or that are visible through transparent or translucent components of the display generating components because the computer system does not obscure / prevent their visibility through the display generating components). In some embodiments, at a low immersion level (e.g., a first immersion level), background, virtual, and / or real objects are displayed in an unobscured manner. For example, a virtual environment at a low immersion level is optionally displayed simultaneously with background content, and the background content is optionally displayed at full brightness, color, and / or translucency. In some embodiments, at a higher immersion level (e.g., a second immersion level higher than the first immersion level), background, virtual, and / or real objects are displayed in an obscured manner (e.g., dimmed, blurred, or removed from the display). For example, a separate virtual environment having a high immersion level is displayed without simultaneously displaying background content (e.g., in full screen or fully immersive mode). As another example, a virtual environment displayed at an intermediate immersion level is simultaneously displayed with dimmed, blurred, or otherwise de-highlighted background content. In some embodiments, the visual characteristics of the background objects differ among the background objects. For example, at a particular immersion level, one or more first background objects are visually less highlighted (e.g., dimmed, blurred, and / or displayed with increasing transparency) than one or more second background objects, and one or more third background objects are discontinued.In some embodiments, a null or zero immersion level corresponds to ceasing to display the virtual environment, and instead displaying a representation of the physical environment (optionally along with one or more virtual objects, such as applications, windows, or virtual three-dimensional objects) without the representation of the physical environment being obscured by the virtual environment. Adjusting the immersion level using physical input elements provides a fast and efficient way to adjust immersion, improving usability of computer systems and making user-device interfaces more efficient.

[0061] Perspective-Locked Virtual Object: A virtual object is perspective-locked when the computer system displays the virtual object in the same location and / or position within the user's perspective, even as the user's perspective shifts (e.g., changes). In embodiments in which the computer system is a head-mounted device, the user's perspective is locked to the forward-facing orientation of the user's head (e.g., the user's perspective is at least a portion of the user's field of view when the user is looking straight ahead). Thus, the user's perspective remains fixed even as the user's line of sight moves without moving the user's head. In embodiments in which the computer system has a display generating component (e.g., a display screen) that can be repositioned relative to the user's head, the user's perspective is the augmented reality view being presented to the user on the display generating component of the computer system. For example, a perspective-locked virtual object that is displayed in the upper left corner of the user's perspective when the user's perspective is in a first orientation (e.g., the user's head is facing north) continues to be displayed in the upper left corner of the user's perspective when the user's perspective changes to a second orientation (e.g., the user's head is facing west). In other words, the location and / or position at which a viewpoint-locked virtual object is displayed in a user's viewpoint is independent of the user's position and / or orientation in the physical environment. In embodiments in which the computer system is a head-mounted device, the user's viewpoint is locked to the orientation of the user's head, such that the virtual object is also referred to as a "head-locked virtual object."

[0062] Environment-Locked Virtual Object: A virtual object is environment-locked (or "world-locked") when a computer system displays the virtual object at a location and / or position within a user's viewpoint that is based on (e.g., selected with reference to and / or anchored to) locations and / or objects within a three-dimensional environment (e.g., a physical environment or a virtual environment). As the user's viewpoint shifts, the locations and / or objects within the environment relative to the user's viewpoint change, resulting in the environment-locked virtual object appearing at a different location and / or position within the user's viewpoint. For example, an environment-locked virtual object locked to a tree directly in front of the user will appear centered within the user's viewpoint. If the user's viewpoint shifts to the right (e.g., the user's head is turned to the right) and the tree becomes more left-leaning within the user's viewpoint (e.g., the position of the tree within the user's viewpoint shifts), the environment-locked virtual object locked to the tree will appear more left-leaning within the user's viewpoint. In other words, the location and / or position at which the environment-locked virtual object appears within the user's viewpoint depends on the position and / or orientation of the location and / or object in the environment to which the virtual object is locked. In some embodiments, the computer system uses a stationary reference frame (e.g., a coordinate system fixed to a fixed location and / or object in the physical environment) to determine a position at which to display an environment-locked virtual object in the user's viewpoint. The environment-locked virtual object can be locked to a stationary portion of the environment (e.g., a floor, wall, table, or other stationary object) or can be locked to a moving portion of the environment (e.g., a vehicle, an animal, a person, or a representation of a part of the user's body that moves independent of the user's viewpoint, such as the user's hand, wrist, arm, or leg), so that the virtual object moves as the viewpoint or part of the environment moves in order to maintain a fixed relationship between the virtual object and the part of the environment.

[0063] In some embodiments, an environment-locked or viewpoint-locked virtual object exhibits delayed-following behavior, which reduces or delays the movement of the environment-locked or viewpoint-locked virtual object relative to the movement of a reference point that the virtual object is following. In some embodiments, when exhibiting delayed-following behavior, the computer system intentionally delays the movement of the virtual object when it detects movement of the reference point that the virtual object is following (e.g., a part of the environment, the viewpoint, or a point fixed relative to the viewpoint, such as a point between 5 and 300 cm from the viewpoint). For example, when the reference point (e.g., a part of the environment or the viewpoint) moves at a first speed, the virtual object is moved by the device to remain locked to the reference point, but at a second speed that is slower than the first speed (e.g., until the reference point stops or slows down, at which point the virtual object begins to catch up with the reference point). In some embodiments, when the virtual object exhibits delayed-following behavior, the device ignores small amounts of movement of the reference point (e.g., ignores movement of the reference point that is less than a threshold amount of movement, such as movement between 0 and 5 degrees or movement between 0 and 50 cm). For example, when the reference point (e.g., a portion of the environment or a viewpoint to which the virtual object is locked) moves by a first amount, the distance between the reference point and the virtual object increases (e.g., because the virtual object is displayed to maintain a fixed or substantially fixed position relative to a viewpoint or portion of the environment different from the reference point to which the virtual object is locked), and when the reference point (e.g., a portion of the environment or a viewpoint to which the virtual object is locked) moves by a second amount greater than the first amount, the distance between the reference point and the virtual object initially increases (e.g., because the virtual object is displayed to maintain a fixed or substantially fixed position relative to a viewpoint or portion of the environment different from the reference point to which the virtual object is locked), and then decreases as the amount of movement of the reference point increases beyond a threshold (e.g., a “delayed following” threshold) as the virtual object is moved by the computer system to maintain a fixed or substantially fixed position relative to the reference point.In some embodiments, a virtual object maintaining a substantially fixed position relative to a reference point includes the virtual object being displayed within a threshold distance (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 5, 15, 20, 50 cm) of the reference point in one or more dimensions (e.g., above / below, left / right, and / or forward / backward relative to the position of the reference point).

[0064] Hardware: There are many different types of electronic systems that allow a person to sense and / or interact with various XR environments. Examples include head-mounted systems, projection-based systems, head-up displays (HUDs), vehicle windshields with integrated display capabilities, windows with integrated display capabilities, displays formed as lenses designed to be placed over a person's eyes (e.g., contact lenses), headphones / earphones, speaker arrays, input systems (e.g., wearable or handheld controllers with or without haptic feedback), smartphones, tablets, and desktop / laptop computers. A head-mounted system may have one or more speaker(s) and an integrated opaque display. Alternatively, a head-mounted system may be configured to accept an external opaque display (e.g., a smartphone). A head-mounted system may incorporate one or more imaging sensors for capturing images or video of the physical environment and / or one or more microphones for capturing audio of the physical environment. A head-mounted system may have a transparent or translucent display rather than an opaque display. A transparent or translucent display may have a medium through which light representing an image is directed toward a person's eyes. The display may utilize digital light projection, OLED, LED, uLED, liquid crystal on silicon, laser-scanned light source, or any combination of these technologies. The medium may be a light guide, a holographic medium, an optical combiner, an optical reflector, or any combination thereof. In one embodiment, the transparent or translucent display may be configured to be selectively opaque. A projection-based system may employ retinal projection technology that projects graphical images onto a person's retina. The projection system may also be configured to project virtual objects into the physical environment, for example, as holograms or onto physical surfaces. In some embodiments, the controller 110 is configured to manage and coordinate the XR experience for the user.In some embodiments, controller 110 includes a suitable combination of software, firmware, and / or hardware. Controller 110 is described in more detail below with reference to FIG. 2. In some embodiments, controller 110 is a computing device that is local or remote to scene 105 (e.g., the physical environment). For example, controller 110 is a local server located within scene 105. In another example, controller 110 is a remote server (e.g., a cloud server, a central server, etc.) located outside scene 105. In some embodiments, controller 110 is communicatively coupled to display generation component 120 (e.g., an HMD, a display, a projector, a touchscreen, etc.) via one or more wired or wireless communication channels 144 (e.g., BLUETOOTH, IEEE 802.11x, IEEE 802.16x, IEEE 802.3x, etc.). In another example, the controller 110 is contained within the housing (e.g., physical housing) of one or more of the display generating component 120 (e.g., an HMD or a portable electronic device including a display and one or more processors), one or more of the input devices 125, one or more of the output devices 155, one or more of the sensors 190, and / or one or more of the peripheral devices 195, or shares the same physical housing or support structure as one or more of the foregoing.

[0065] In some embodiments, display generation component 120 is configured to provide an XR experience (e.g., at least a visual component of the XR experience) to a user. In some embodiments, display generation component 120 includes a suitable combination of software, firmware, and / or hardware. Display generation component 120 is described in more detail below with reference to FIG. 3. In some embodiments, the functionality of controller 110 is provided by and / or combined with display generation component 120.

[0066] According to some embodiments, the display generation component 120 provides an XR experience to the user while the user is virtually and / or physically present in the scene 105.

[0067] In some embodiments, the display generating component is worn on a part of the user's body (e.g., on their head, their hand, etc.). Thus, display generating component 120 includes one or more XR displays provided for displaying XR content. For example, in various embodiments, display generating component 120 surrounds the user's field of view. In some embodiments, display generating component 120 is a handheld device (e.g., a smartphone or tablet) configured to present XR content, where the user holds the device with a display pointed toward the user's field of view and a camera pointed toward scene 105. In some embodiments, the handheld device is optionally located within a housing worn on the user's head. In some embodiments, the handheld device is optionally located on a support (e.g., a tripod) in front of the user. In some embodiments, display generating component 120 is an XR chamber, housing, or room configured to present XR content without the user wearing or holding display generating component 120. Many user interfaces described with reference to one type of hardware for displaying XR content (e.g., a handheld device or a device on a tripod) may be implemented on another type of hardware for displaying XR content (e.g., an HMD or other wearable computing device). For example, a user interface illustrating interactions with XR content that are triggered based on interactions occurring in the space in front of a handheld or tripod-mounted device may be implemented similarly to an HMD in which the interactions occur in the space in front of the HMD and the XR content responses are displayed via the HMD. Similarly, a user interface illustrating interactions with XR content that are triggered based on movement of a handheld or tripod-mounted device relative to the physical environment (e.g., scene 105 or a part of the user's body (e.g., the user's eye(s), head, or hands)) may be implemented similarly to an HMD in which the movement is caused by movement of the HMD relative to the physical environment (e.g., scene 105 or a part of the user's body (e.g., the user's eye(s), head, or hands)).

[0068] While relevant features of operating environment 100 are shown in FIG. 1A , those skilled in the art will understand from this disclosure that various other features are not shown for the sake of brevity so as not to obscure more pertinent aspects of the exemplary embodiments disclosed herein.

[0069] 1A-1P illustrate various examples of computer systems that can be used to perform the methods and provide audio, visual, and / or haptic feedback as part of the user interfaces described herein. In some embodiments, the computer system optionally includes one or more display generation components (e.g., first and second display assemblies 1-120a, 1-120b and / or first and second optical modules 11.1.1-104a and 11.1.1-104b) for displaying representations of virtual elements and / or the physical environment to a user of the computer system, the representations being generated based on detected events and / or user input detected by the computer system. The user interface generated by the computer system is optionally corrected by one or more corrective lenses 11.3.2-216, optionally removably attached to one or more of the optical modules, to enable users who otherwise correct their vision using glasses or contact lenses to more easily view the user interface. While many user interfaces shown herein show a single view of the user interface, the user interface in the HMD is optionally displayed using two optical modules (e.g., first and second display assemblies 1-120a, 1-120b and / or first and second optical modules 11.1.1-104a and 11.1.1-104b), one for the user's right eye and a different one for the user's left eye, with slightly different images presented to the two different eyes to create the illusion of stereoscopic depth, and the single view of the user interface is typically either a right-eye or left-eye view, and the depth effect is explained in text or using other schematic diagrams or views.In some embodiments, the computer system includes one or more external displays (e.g., display assembly 1-108) for displaying status information of the computer system to a user of the computer system (when the computer system is not being worn) and / or other people near the computer system, optionally generated based on detected events and / or user input detected by the computer system. In some embodiments, the computer system includes one or more audio output components (e.g., electronic components 1-112) for generating audio feedback, optionally generated based on detected events and / or user input detected by the computer system. In some embodiments, the computer system includes one or more input devices for detecting inputs, such as one or more sensors (e.g., sensor assembly 1-356 and / or one or more sensors in FIG. 1I) for detecting information about the physical environment of a device that can be used (optionally in conjunction with one or more illuminators, such as the illuminators described in FIG. 1I) to generate a digital pass-through image, capture visual media (e.g., photographs and / or videos) corresponding to the physical environment, or determine the pose (e.g., position and / or orientation) of physical objects and / or surfaces within the physical environment, so that virtual objects can be positioned based on the detected pose of the physical objects and / or surfaces. In some embodiments, the computer system includes one or more input devices for detecting input, such as one or more sensors for detecting hand position and / or movement (e.g., sensor assembly 1-356 and / or one or more sensors in FIG. 1I), which can be used (optionally in conjunction with one or more illuminators, such as illuminator 6-124 shown in FIG. 1I) to determine when one or more air gestures are performed.In some embodiments, the computer system includes one or more input devices for detecting input, such as one or more sensors for detecting eye movement (e.g., the eye tracking and gaze tracking sensors of FIG. 1I ), which may be used (optionally in conjunction with one or more lights, such as light 11.3.2-110 of FIG. 1O ) to determine attention or gaze position and / or gaze movement, which may optionally be used to detect gaze-only input based on gaze movement and / or dwell. A combination of the various sensors described above may be used to determine a user's facial expressions and / or hand movements for use in generating an avatar or representation of the user, such as an anthropomorphic avatar or representation for use in a real-time communication session, the avatar having facial expressions, hand movements, and / or body movements based on or similar to the detected facial expressions, hand movements, and / or body movements of the user of the device. Gaze and / or attention information is optionally combined with hand tracking information to determine interactions between the user and one or more user interfaces based on direct and / or indirect inputs, such as air gestures or inputs using one or more hardware input devices, such as one or more buttons (e.g., first button 1-128, button 11.1.1-114, second button 1-132, and / or dial or button 1-328), knobs (e.g., first button 1-128, button 11.1.1-114, and / or dial or button 1-328), digital crowns (e.g., pressable and twistable or rotatable first button 1-128, button 11.1.1-114, and / or dial or button 1-328), trackpads, touchscreens, keyboards, mice, and / or other input devices.One or more buttons (e.g., first button 1-128, button 11.1.1-114, second button 1-132, and / or dial or button 1-328) are optionally used to perform system operations such as re-centering content within the three-dimensional environment visible to the device user, displaying a home user interface for launching an application, initiating a real-time communication session, or initiating the display of a virtual three-dimensional background. The knob or digital crown (e.g., a first button 1-128, button 11.1.1-114, and / or a dial or button 1-328 that is depressible and twistable or rotatable) is optionally rotatable to adjust parameters of the visual content, such as the immersion level of the virtual three-dimensional environment (e.g., the degree to which the virtual content occupies the user's viewport into the three-dimensional environment), or other parameters associated with the three-dimensional environment and the virtual content displayed via the optical module (e.g., first and second display assemblies 1-120a, 1-120b and / or first and second optical modules 11.1.1-104a and 11.1.1-104b).

[0070] 1B shows a front, top, and perspective view of an example head-mountable display (HMD) device 1-100 configured to be worn by a user and provide virtual and altered / mixed reality (VR / AR) experiences. The HMD 1-100 can include a display unit 1-102 or assembly, an electronic strap assembly 1-104 connected to and extending from the display unit 1-102, and a band assembly 1-106 secured at either end to the electronic strap assembly 1-104. The electronic strap assembly 1-104 and band 1-106 can be part of a retention assembly configured to wrap around a user's head to hold the display unit 1-102 against the user's face.

[0071] In at least one example, the band assembly 1-106 can include a first band 1-116 configured to wrap around the back of the user's head and a second band 1-117 configured to extend over the top of the user's head. The second strap can extend between the first electronic strap 1-105a and the second electronic strap 1-105b of the electronic strap assembly 1-104, as shown. The strap assembly 1-104 and the band assembly 1-106 can be part of a fastening mechanism that extends rearward from the display unit 1-102 and is configured to hold the display unit 1-102 against the user's face.

[0072] In at least one example, the anchoring mechanism includes a first electronics strap 1-105a including a first proximal end 1-134 coupled to the display unit 1-102, e.g., a housing 1-150 of the display unit 1-102, and a first distal end 1-136 opposite the first proximal end 1-134. The anchoring mechanism can also include a second electronics strap 1-105b including a second proximal end 1-138 coupled to the housing 1-150 of the display unit 1-102, and a second distal end 1-140 opposite the second proximal end 1-138. The anchoring mechanism can also include a first band 1-116 including a first end 1-142 coupled to the first distal end 1-136 and a second end 1-144 coupled to the second distal end 1-140, and a second band 1-117 extending between the first electronic strap 1-105a and the second electronic strap 1-105b. The straps 1-105a-b and the band 1-116 can be coupled via a connection mechanism or assembly 1-114. In at least one example, the second band 1-117 includes a first end 1-146 coupled to the first electronic strap 1-105a between a first proximal end 1-134 and a first distal end 1-136, and a second end 1-148 coupled to the second electronic strap 1-105b between a second proximal end 1-138 and a second distal end 1-140.

[0073] In at least one example, the first and second electronic straps 1-105a-b include plastic, metal, or other structural material that forms the shape of the substantially rigid straps 1-105a-b. In at least one example, the first and second bands 1-116, 1-117 are formed from a resilient, flexible material including woven fabric, rubber, etc. The first and second bands 1-116, 1-117 can be flexible to conform to the shape of a user's head when wearing the HMD 1-100.

[0074] In at least one example, one or more of the first and second electronic straps 1-105a-b can define an internal strap volume and can include one or more electronic components disposed within the internal strap volume. In one example, as shown in FIG. 1B, the first electronic strap 1-105a can include an electronic component 1-112. In one example, the electronic component 1-112 can include a speaker. In one example, the electronic component 1-112 can include a computing component such as a processor.

[0075] In at least one example, the housing 1-150 defines a first, forward-facing opening 1-152. The display assembly 1-108 is disposed to block the first opening 1-152 from view when the HMD 1-100 is assembled, and therefore the forward-facing opening is labeled 1-152 with a dotted line in FIG. 1B . The housing 1-150 may also define a rear-facing second opening 1-154. The housing 1-150 also defines an interior volume between the first opening 1-152 and the second opening 1-154. In at least one example, the HMD 1-100 includes a display assembly 1-108, which may include a front cover and a display screen (shown in other figures) disposed within or across the front opening 1-152 to block the front opening 1-152. In at least one example, the display screen of the display assembly 1-108, as well as the entire display assembly 1-108, has a curvature configured to follow the curvature of the user's face. The display screen of the display assembly 1-108 can curve to complement the user's facial features and the overall curvature from one side of the face to the other, e.g., from left to right and / or top to bottom when the display unit 1-102 is pressed, as shown.

[0076] In at least one example, the housing 1-150 can define a first aperture 1-126 between the first opening 1-152 and the second opening 1-154, and a second aperture 1-130 between the first opening 1-152 and the second opening 1-154. The HMD 1-100 can also include a first button 1-128 disposed in the first aperture 1-126 and a second button 1-132 disposed in the second aperture 1-130. The first and second buttons 1-128, 1-132 can be depressible through the respective apertures 1-126, 1-130. In at least one example, the first button 1-126 and / or the second button 1-132 can be twistable dials and pressable buttons. In at least one example, the first button 1-128 is a depressible and twistable dial button, and the second button 1-132 is a depressible button.

[0077] FIG. 1C shows a rear perspective view of the HMD 1-100. The HMD 1-100 can include a light seal 1-110 extending rearward from a housing 1-150 of the display assembly 1-108 around the periphery of the housing 1-150, as shown. The light seal 1-110 can be configured to extend from the housing 1-150 to the user's face around the user's eyes to block external light from being seen. In one example, the HMD 1-100 can include first and second display assemblies 1-120a, 1-120b disposed at or within a rearward-facing second opening 1-154 defined by the housing 1-150 and / or disposed within an interior volume of the housing 1-150 and configured to project light through the second opening 1-154. In at least one example, each display assembly 1-120a-b can include a respective display screen 1-122a, 1-122b configured to project light in a rearward direction through the second opening 1-154 toward the user's eyes.

[0078] In at least one example, with reference to both FIG. 1B and FIG. 1C , the display assembly 1-108 can be a front-facing display assembly including a display screen configured to project light in a first, forward direction, and the rear-facing display screens 1-122a-b can be configured to project light in a second, rearward direction opposite the first direction. As described above, the light seal 1-110 can be configured to block light external to the HMD 1-100, including light projected by the front-facing display screen of the display assembly 1-108 shown in the front perspective view of FIG. 1B, from reaching the user's eyes. In at least one example, the HMD 1-100 can also include a curtain 1-124 blocking a second opening 1-154 between the housing 1-150 and the rear-facing display assemblies 1-120a-b. In at least one example, the curtain 1-124 can be elastic or at least partially elastic.

[0079] Any of the features, components, and / or parts shown in Figures 1B and 1C, including their arrangements and configurations, alone or in any combination, may be included in any of the other example devices, features, components, and parts shown in Figures 1D-1F and described herein. Similarly, any of the features, components, and / or parts shown and described with reference to Figures 1D-1F, including their arrangements and configurations, alone or in any combination, may be included in the example devices, features, components, and parts shown in Figures 1B and 1C.

[0080] 1D shows an exploded view of an example of an HMD 1-200 including various portions or components separated according to modularity and selective coupling of those components. For example, the HMD 1-200 can include a band 1-216 that can be selectively coupled to first and second electronic straps 1-205a, 1-205b. The first anchoring strap 1-205a can include a first electronic component 1-212a, and the second anchoring strap 1-205b can include a second electronic component 1-212b. In at least one example, the first and second straps 1-205a-b can be removably coupled to the display unit 1-202.

[0081] Additionally, the HMD 1-200 may include a light seal 1-210 configured to be removably coupled to the display unit 1-202. The HMD 1-200 may also include lenses 1-218 that may be removably coupled to the display unit 1-202, for example, on first and second display assemblies including a display screen. The lenses 1-218 may include customized prescription lenses configured for vision correction. As noted, each component shown in the exploded view of FIG. 1D and described above may be removably coupled, attached, reattached, or interchangeable to update or replace components for different users. For example, bands such as band 1-216, light seals such as light seal 1-210, lenses such as lens 1-218, and electronic straps such as straps 1-205a-b may be interchangeable depending on the user, such that these components are customized to fit and accommodate individual users of the HMD 1-200.

[0082] Any of the features, components, and / or parts shown in Figure 1D, including their arrangements and configurations, alone or in any combination, may be included in any of the other example devices, features, components, and parts shown in Figures 1B, 1C, and 1E-1F and described herein. Similarly, any of the features, components, and / or parts shown and described with reference to Figures 1B, 1C, and 1E-1F, including their arrangements and configurations, alone or in any combination, may be included in the example devices, features, components, and parts shown in Figure 1D.

[0083] 1E shows an exploded view of an example display unit 1-306 of an HMD. The display unit 1-306 may include a front display assembly 1-308, a frame / housing assembly 1-350, and a curtain assembly 1-324. The display unit 1-306 may also include a sensor assembly 1-356, a logic board assembly 1-358, and a cooling assembly 1-360 disposed between the frame assembly 1-350 and the front display assembly 1-308. In at least one example, the display unit 1-306 may also include a rear-facing display assembly 1-320 including first and second rear-facing display screens 1-322a, 1-322b disposed between the frame 1-350 and the curtain assembly 1-324.

[0084] In at least one example, the display unit 1-306 can also include a motor assembly 1-362 configured as an adjustment mechanism for adjusting the position of the display screens 1-322a-b of the display assembly 1-320 relative to the frame 1-350. In at least one example, the display assembly 1-320 is mechanically coupled to the motor assemblies 1-362 with at least one motor for each display screen 1-322a-b such that the motors can translate the display screens 1-322a-b to match the interpupillary distance of a user's eyes.

[0085] In at least one example, the display unit 1-306 can include a dial or button 1-328 that is depressible relative to the frame 1-350 and accessible to a user outside of the frame 1-350. The button 1-328 can be electronically connected to the motor assembly 1-362 via a controller such that a user can operate the button 1-328 to cause motors in the motor assembly 1-362 to adjust the position of the display screen 1-322a-b.

[0086] Any of the features, components, and / or parts shown in Figure 1E, including their arrangements and configurations, alone or in any combination, may be included in any of the other example devices, features, components, and parts shown in Figures 1B, 1D, and 1F and described herein. Similarly, any of the features, components, and / or parts shown and described with reference to Figures 1B, 1D, and 1F, including their arrangements and configurations, alone or in any combination, may be included in the example devices, features, components, and parts shown in Figure 1E.

[0087] 1F shows an exploded view of another example display unit 1-406 of an HMD device similar to other HMD devices described herein. The display unit 1-406 can include a forward display assembly 1-402, a sensor assembly 1-456, a logic board assembly 1-458, a cooling assembly 1-460, a frame assembly 1-450, a rear-facing display assembly 1-421, and a curtain assembly 1-424. The display unit 1-406 can also include a motor assembly 1-462 for adjusting the position of first and second display subassemblies 1-420a, 1-420b of the rear-facing display assembly 1-421, including respective first and second display screens for interpupillary adjustment, as described above.

[0088] The various components, systems, and assemblies shown in the exploded view of Figure 1F are described in more detail herein with reference to Figures 1B-1E and subsequent figures referenced in this disclosure. The display unit 1-406 shown in Figure 1F can be assembled and integrated with the fastening mechanisms shown in Figures 1B-1E, including electronic straps, bands, and other components including light seals, connection assemblies, etc.

[0089] Any of the features, components, and / or parts shown in Figure 1F, including their arrangements and configurations, alone or in any combination, may be included in any of the other example devices, features, components, and parts shown in Figures 1B-1E and described herein. Similarly, any of the features, components, and / or parts shown and described with reference to Figures 1B-1E, including their arrangements and configurations, alone or in any combination, may be included in the example devices, features, components, and parts shown in Figure 1F.

[0090] FIG. 1G shows a perspective exploded view of a front cover assembly 3-100 of an HMD device described herein, such as the front cover assembly 3-1 of the HMD 3-100 shown in FIG. 1G, or any other HMD device shown and described herein. The front cover assembly 3-100 shown in FIG. 1G can include a transparent or translucent cover 3-102, a shroud 3-104 (or "canopy"), an adhesive layer 3-106, a display assembly 3-108 including a lenticular lens panel or array 3-110, and structural trim 3-112. The adhesive layer 3-106 can bond the shroud 3-104 and / or the transparent cover 3-102 to the display assembly 3-108 and / or the trim 3-112. The trim 3-112 can bond various components of the front cover assembly 3-100 to the frame or chassis of the HMD device.

[0091] In at least one example, as shown in FIG. 1G, a display assembly 3-108 including a transparent cover 3-102, a shroud 3-104, and a lenticular lens array 3-110 can be curved to accommodate the curvature of a user's face. The transparent cover 3-102 and the shroud 3-104 can be curved in two or three dimensions, for example, vertically in the Z direction in or out of the ZX plane and horizontally in the X direction in or out of the ZX plane. In at least one example, the display assembly 3-108 can include a display panel having pixels configured to project light through the lenticular lens array 3-110 and the shroud 3-104 and the transparent cover 3-102. The display assembly 3-108 can be curved in at least one direction, for example, horizontally, to accommodate the curvature of a user's face from one side (e.g., left side) to the other side (e.g., right side) of the face. In at least one example, shown and described in more detail in subsequent figures, each layer or component of the display assembly 3-108, which may include the lenticular lens array 3-110 and the display layer, can be curved horizontally in a similar or concentric manner to accommodate the curvature of the user's face.

[0092] In at least one example, the shroud 3-104 can include a transparent or translucent material through which the display assembly 3-108 projects light. In one example, the shroud 3-104 can include one or more opaque portions, such as opaque ink prints or other opaque film portions, on a rear surface of the shroud 3-104. The rear surface can be the surface of the shroud 3-104 that faces the user's eyes when the HMD device is worn. In at least one example, the opaque portion can be on a front surface of the shroud 3-104 opposite the rear surface. In at least one example, the one or more opaque portions of the shroud 3-104 can include a peripheral portion that visually obscures any components around the perimeter of the display screen of the display assembly 3-108. In this manner, the opaque portions of the shroud hide any other components, including electronic components, structural components, etc., of the HMD device that would otherwise be visible through the transparent or translucent cover 3-102 and / or shroud 3-104.

[0093] In at least one example, the shroud 3-104 can define one or more aperture transparent portions 3-120 through which sensors can transmit and receive signals. In one example, the portions 3-120 are apertures through which sensors can extend or transmit and receive signals. In one example, the portions 3-120 are transparent portions, or portions that are more transparent than the surrounding translucent or opaque portions of the shroud, through which sensors can transmit and receive signals through the shroud and through the transparent cover 3-102. In one example, the sensors can include a camera, an IR sensor, a LUX sensor, or any other visual or non-visual environmental sensor of the HMD device.

[0094] Any of the features, components, and / or parts shown in Figure 1G, including their arrangement and configuration, alone or in any combination, may be included in any of the other example devices, features, components, and parts described herein. Similarly, any of the features, components, and / or parts shown and described herein, including their arrangement and configuration, alone or in any combination, may be included in the example devices, features, components, and parts shown in Figure 1G.

[0095] 1H shows an exploded view of an example of an HMD device 6-100. The HMD device 6-100 can include a sensor array or system 6-102 including one or more sensors, cameras, projectors, etc. attached to one or more components of the HMD 6-100. In at least one example, the sensor system 6-102 can include a bracket 1-338 to which one or more sensors of the sensor system 6-102 can be secured / fixed.

[0096] FIG. 1I illustrates a portion of an HMD device 6-100, including a front transparent cover 6-104 and a sensor system 6-102. The sensor system 6-102 can include multiple different sensors, emitters, and receivers, including cameras, IR sensors, projectors, and the like. The transparent cover 6-104 is shown in front of the sensor system 6-102 to illustrate the relative positions of the various sensors and emitters and the orientation of each sensor / emitter in the system 6-102. As referenced herein, terms such as "sideways," "sideways," "horizontal," and similar terms refer to orientations or directions as indicated by the X-axis shown in FIG. 1J. Terms such as "vertical," "upper," "lower," and similar terms refer to orientations or directions as indicated by the Z-axis shown in FIG. 1J. Terms such as "forward," "rearward," "forward," and "rearward," and similar terms refer to orientations or directions as indicated by the Y-axis shown in FIG. 1J.

[0097] In at least one example, a transparent cover 6-104 can define the front exterior surface of the HMD device 6-100, and a sensor system 6-102 including various sensors and their components can be disposed behind the cover 6-104 in the Y axis / direction. The cover 6-104 can be transparent or translucent to allow light, both detected by and emitted by the sensor system 6-102, to pass through the cover 6-104.

[0098] As discussed elsewhere herein, the HMD device 6-100 may include one or more controllers including a processor for electrically coupling the various sensors and emitters of the sensor system 6-102 with other electronic devices, such as one or more motherboards, processing units, and display screens. Additionally, as discussed in more detail below with reference to other figures, the various sensors, emitters, and other components of the sensor system 6-102 may be coupled to various structural frame members, brackets, etc. of the HMD device 6-100 that are not shown in FIG. 1I. For clarity of illustration, FIG. 1I shows the components of the sensor system 6-102 unattached from and electrically uncoupled from other components.

[0099] In at least one example, the device can include one or more controllers having a processor configured to execute instructions stored on a memory component electrically coupled to the processor, the instructions including, or capable of being executed by, one or more algorithms for self-correcting the various camera angles and positions described herein over time with use as the initial camera position, angle, or orientation is bumped or distorted due to an unintentional drop event or other event.

[0100] In at least one example, the sensor system 6-102 can include one or more scene cameras 6-106. The system 6-102 can include two scene cameras 6-106 disposed on either side of the bridge or arch of the nose of the HMD device 6-100, such that each of the two cameras 6-102 approximately corresponds to the position of the user's left and right eyes behind the cover 6-103. In at least one example, the scene cameras 6-106 are oriented generally forward in the Y direction to capture images in front of the user while the HMD 6-100 is in use. In at least one example, the scene cameras are color cameras and provide images and content for MR video pass-through to a display screen facing the user's eyes when using the HMD device 6-100. The scene cameras 6-106 can also be used for environment and object reconstruction.

[0101] In at least one example, the sensor system 6-102 may include a first depth sensor 6-108 oriented generally forward in the Y direction. In at least one example, the first depth sensor 6-108 may be used for environment and object reconstruction and hand and body tracking of the user. In at least one example, the sensor system 6-102 may include a second depth sensor 6-110 centrally disposed along the width of the HMD device 6-100 (e.g., along the X axis). For example, the second depth sensor 6-110 may be positioned in alignment with the center bridge or feature above the user's nose when wearing the HMD 6-100. In at least one example, the second depth sensor 6-110 may be used for environment and object reconstruction and hand and body tracking. In at least one example, the second depth sensor may include a LIDAR sensor.

[0102] In at least one example, the sensor system 6-102 can include a generally forward-facing depth projector 6-112 for projecting electromagnetic waves, e.g., in the form of a predetermined pattern of light dots, into and within a field of view of, or including and beyond, the user and / or scene camera 6-106. In at least one example, the depth projector can project electromagnetic waves of light in the form of a dot light pattern that reflects off objects and returns to the depth sensors described above, including the depth sensors 6-108, 6-110. In at least one example, the depth projector 6-112 can be used for environment and object reconstruction and hand and body tracking.

[0103] In at least one example, the sensor system 6-102 may include downward-facing cameras 6-114 having fields of view directed generally downward relative to the HMD device 6-100 in the Z-axis. In at least one example, the downward-facing cameras 6-114 may be disposed on the left and right sides of the HMD device 6-100 as shown and may be used for hand and body tracking, headset tracking, and facial avatar detection and creation to display a user avatar on the forward-facing display screen of the HMD device 6-100 as described elsewhere herein. The downward-facing cameras 6-114 may be used to capture facial expressions and movements of the user below the HMD device 6-100, including, for example, the cheeks, mouth, and chin.

[0104] In at least one example, the sensor system 6-102 may include chin cameras 6-116. In at least one example, the chin cameras 6-116 are disposed on the left and right sides of the HMD device 6-100 as shown and may be used for hand and body tracking, headset tracking, and facial avatar detection and creation to display a user avatar on the forward-facing display screen of the HMD device 6-100 as described elsewhere herein. The chin cameras 6-116 may be used to capture the expressions and movements of the user's face below the HMD device 6-100, including, for example, the user's chin, cheeks, mouth, and jaw. For hand and body tracking, headset tracking, and facial avatar,

[0105] In at least one example, the sensor system 6-102 can include a side camera 6-118. The side camera 6-118 can be oriented to capture left and right side views in the X-axis or direction relative to the HMD device 6-100. In at least one example, the side camera 6-118 can be used for hand and body tracking, headset tracking, and facial avatar detection and reconstruction.

[0106] In at least one example, the sensor system 6-102 can include multiple eye tracking and gaze tracking sensors for determining the identity, status, and gaze direction of a user's eyes during and / or before use. In at least one example, the eye / gaze tracking sensors can include nose-eye cameras 6-120 disposed on either side of and adjacent to the user's nose when the HMD device 6-100 is worn. The eye / gaze sensors can also include under-eye cameras 6-122 disposed below each user's eye for capturing eye images for facial avatar detection and creation, gaze tracking, and iris identification functions.

[0107] In at least one example, the sensor system 6-102 includes an infrared illuminator 6-124 directed outward from the HMD device 6-100 to illuminate the external environment and any objects therein with IR light for IR detection by one or more IR sensors of the sensor system 6-102. In at least one example, the sensor system 6-102 can include a flicker sensor 6-126 and an ambient light sensor 6-128. In at least one example, the flicker sensor 6-126 can detect the overhead light refresh rate to avoid display flicker. In one example, the infrared illuminator 6-124 can include a light-emitting diode and can be used, among other things, in low-light environments to illuminate a user's hands and other objects in low light for detection by the infrared sensors of the sensor system 6-102.

[0108] In at least one example, multiple sensors including a scene camera 6-106, a downward-facing camera 6-114, a chin camera 6-116, a side camera 6-118, a depth projector 6-112, and depth sensors 6-108, 6-110 can be used in combination with an electrically coupled controller to combine depth data with camera data for hand tracking and sizing for better hand tracking and object recognition and tracking capabilities of the HMD device 6-100. In at least one example, the downward-facing camera 6-114, chin camera 6-116, and side camera 6-118 described above and shown in FIG. 1I can be wide-angle cameras capable of operating in the visible and infrared spectrum. In at least one example, these cameras 6-114, 6-116, 6-118 can operate with only black and white light detection to simplify image processing and increase sensitivity.

[0109] Any of the features, components, and / or parts shown in Figure 1I, including their arrangements and configurations, alone or in any combination, may be included in any of the other example devices, features, components, and parts shown in Figures 1J-1L and described herein. Similarly, any of the features, components, and / or parts shown and described with reference to Figures 1J-1L, including their arrangements and configurations, alone or in any combination, may be included in the example devices, features, components, and parts shown in Figure 1I.

[0110] 1J shows a bottom perspective view of an example of an HMD 6-200 including a cover or shroud 6-204 secured to a frame 6-230. In at least one example, the sensors 6-203 of the sensor system 6-202 can be disposed around the periphery of the HDM 6-200 such that the sensors 6-203 are disposed outwardly around the periphery of the display region or area 6-232 so as not to obstruct the view of the displayed light. In at least one example, the sensors can be disposed behind the shroud 6-204 and aligned with a transparent portion of the shroud to allow the sensors and projector to pass light back and forth through the shroud 6-204. In at least one example, an opaque ink or other opaque material or film / layer can be disposed on the shroud 6-204 around the display area 6-232 to obscure components of the HMD 6-200 outside of the display area 6-232 other than the transparent portion defined by the opaque portion, through which the sensors and projector transmit and receive light and electromagnetic signals during operation. In at least one example, the shroud 6-204 allows light to pass through it from the display (e.g., within the display area 6-232), but not radially outward from the display area around the outer periphery of the shroud 6-204.

[0111] In some examples, the shroud 6-204 includes a transparent portion 6-205 and an opaque portion 6-207, as described above and elsewhere herein. In at least one example, the opaque portion 6-207 of the shroud 6-204 can define one or more transparent areas 6-209 through which the sensors 6-203 of the sensor system 6-202 can send and receive signals. In the illustrated example, the sensors 6-203 of the sensor system 6-202, which transmit and receive signals through the shroud 6-204, or more specifically through the transparent region 6-209 of (or defined by) the opaque portion 6-207 of the shroud 6-204, may include sensors the same as or similar to those shown in the example of FIG. 1I, such as depth sensors 6-108 and 6-110, a depth projector 6-112, first and second scene cameras 6-106, first and second downward-facing cameras 6-114, first and second side cameras 6-118, and first and second infrared illuminators 6-124. These sensors are also shown in the examples of FIGS. 1K and 1L. Other sensors, sensor types, numbers of sensors, and their relative positions may be included in one or more other examples of the HMD.

[0112] Any of the features, components, and / or parts shown in Figure 1J, including their arrangement and configuration, either alone or in any combination, may be included in any of the other example devices, features, components, and parts shown in Figure 1I and Figures 1K-1L and described herein. Similarly, any of the features, components, and / or parts shown and described with reference to Figure 1I and Figures 1K-1L, including their arrangement and configuration, either alone or in any combination, may be included in the example devices, features, components, and parts shown in Figure 1J.

[0113] FIG. 1K shows a front view of a portion of an example HMD device 6-300, including a display 6-334, brackets 6-336, 6-338, and a frame or housing 6-330. The example shown in FIG. 1K does not include a front cover or shroud, so as to show the brackets 6-336, 6-338. For example, the shroud 6-204 shown in FIG. 1J includes an opaque portion 6-207 that visually covers / blocks the view of anything outside (e.g., radially / circumferentially outward) of the display / viewing area 6-334, including the sensor 6-303 and bracket 6-338.

[0114] In at least one example, the various sensors of the sensor system 6-302 are coupled to brackets 6-336, 6-338. In at least one example, the scene cameras 6-306 include tight tolerances on their angles relative to one another. For example, the tolerance on the mounting angle between the two scene cameras 6-306 can be 0.5 degrees or less, e.g., 0.3 degrees or less. To achieve and maintain such tight tolerances, in one example, the scene camera 6-306 can be mounted to the bracket 6-338 rather than the shroud. The bracket can include a cantilever arm to which the scene camera 6-306 and other sensors of the sensor system 6-302 can be mounted such that their position and orientation remain undeformed in the event of a drop event by the user that results in any deformation of the other brackets 6-226, the housing 6-330, and / or the shroud.

[0115] Any of the features, components, and / or parts shown in Figure 1K, including their arrangements and configurations, either alone or in any combination, may be included in any of the other example devices, features, components, and parts shown in Figures 1I, 1J, and 1L and described herein. Similarly, any of the features, components, and / or parts shown and described with reference to Figures 1I-1J and 1L, including their arrangements and configurations, either alone or in any combination, may be included in the example devices, features, components, and parts shown in Figure 1K.

[0116] FIG. 1L shows a bottom view of an example HMD 6-400 including a front display / cover assembly 6-404 and a sensor system 6-402. The sensor system 6-402 can be similar to other sensor systems described above and elsewhere herein, including with reference to FIGS. 1I-1K. In at least one example, the chin camera 6-416 can face downward to capture images of the user's lower facial features. In one example, the chin camera 6-416 can be directly coupled to a frame or housing 6-430 or to one or more internal brackets directly coupled to the illustrated frame or housing 6-430. The frame or housing 6-430 can include one or more apertures / openings 6-415 through which the chin camera 6-416 can send and receive signals.

[0117] Any of the features, components, and / or parts shown in Figure 1L, including their arrangements and configurations, alone or in any combination, may be included in any of the other example devices, features, components, and parts shown in Figures 1I-1K and described herein. Similarly, any of the features, components, and / or parts shown and described with reference to Figures 1I-1K, including their arrangements and configurations, alone or in any combination, may be included in the example devices, features, components, and parts shown in Figure 1L.

[0118] 1M shows a rear perspective view of an interpupillary distance (IPD) adjustment system 11.1.1-102 including first and second optical modules 11.1.1-104a-b slidably engaged / coupled to respective guide rods 11.1.1-108a-b and motors 11.1.1-110a-b of left and right adjustment subsystems 11.1.1-106a-b. The IPD adjustment system 11.1.1-102 can include a button 11.1.1-114 coupled to a bracket 11.1.1-112 and in electrical communication with the motors 11.1.1-110a-b. In at least one example, the button 11.1.1-114 is in electrical communication with the first and second motors 11.1.1-110a-b via a processor or other circuit components to activate the first and second motors 11.1.1-110a-b and cause the first and second optical modules 11.1.1-104a-b, respectively, to change position relative to each other.

[0119] In at least one example, the first and second optical modules 11.1.1-104a-b can include respective display screens configured to project light toward the user's eyes when wearing the HMD 11.1.1-100. In at least one example, the user can manipulate (e.g., press and / or rotate) the button 11.1.1-114 to actuate position adjustments of the optical modules 11.1.1-104a-b to match the interpupillary distance of the user's eyes. The optical modules 11.1.1-104a-b can also include one or more cameras or other sensors / sensor systems for imaging and measuring the user's IPD so that the optical modules 11.1.1-104a-b can be adjusted to match the IPD.

[0120] In one example, a user can actuate the button 11.1.1-114 to trigger an automatic position adjustment of the first and second optical modules 11.1.1-104a-b. In one example, a user can actuate the button 11.1.1-114 to trigger a manual adjustment, such as moving the optical modules 11.1.1-104a-b farther or closer together when the user rotates the button 11.1.1-114 in one direction or the other, until the user visually aligns their IPD. In one example, the manual adjustment is communicated electronically via one or more circuits, and power for movement of the optical modules 11.1.1-104a-b via the motors 11.1.1-110a-b is provided by a power source. In one example, the adjustment and movement of the optical modules 11.1.1-104a-b via actuation of the button 11.1.1-114 is mechanically actuated via movement of the button 11.1.1-114.

[0121] Any of the features, components, and / or parts shown in Figure 1M, including their arrangement and configuration, alone or in any combination, may be included in any of the other example devices, features, components, and parts shown in any other figure shown and described herein, as well as any of the features, components, and / or parts, including their arrangement and configuration, either alone or in any combination, shown and described with reference to any other figure shown and described herein.

[0122] FIG. 1N shows a front perspective view of a portion of an HMD 11.1.2-100, including an outer structural frame 11.1.2-102 and an inner or intermediate structural frame 11.1.2-104, which define first and second apertures 11.1.2-106a, 11.1.2-106b. The apertures 11.1.2-106a-b are shown with dashed lines in FIG. 1N because the view of the apertures 11.1.2-106a-b may be obstructed by one or more other components of the HMD 11.1.2-100 coupled to the inner frame 11.1.2-104 and / or the outer frame 11.1.2-102, as shown. In at least one example, the HMD 11.1.2-100 can include a first mounting bracket 11.1.2-108 coupled to the inner frame 11.1.2-104. In at least one example, a mounting bracket 11.1.2-108 is coupled to the inner frame 11.1.2-104 between the first and second apertures 11.1.2-106a-b.

[0123] The mounting bracket 11.1.2-108 may include an intermediate or central portion 11.1.2-109 coupled to the inner frame 11.1.2-104. In some examples, the intermediate or central portion 11.1.2-109 may not be the geometric middle or center of the bracket 11.1.2-108. Rather, the intermediate / central portion 11.1.2-109 may be disposed between first and second cantilevered extension arms extending away from the intermediate portion 11.1.2-109. In at least one example, the mounting bracket 108 includes first and second cantilevered arms 11.1.2-112 and 11.1.2-114 extending away from the intermediate portion 11.1.2-109 of the mounting bracket 11.1.2-108 coupled to the inner frame 11.1.2-104.

[0124] As shown in FIG. 1N, the outer frame 11.1.2-102 can define a curved shape on its underside to accommodate a user's nose when the user is wearing the HMD 11.1.2-100. The curved shape can be referred to as a nose bridge 11.1.2-111 and can be centrally located on the underside of the HMD 11.1.2-100 as shown. In at least one example, the mounting bracket 11.1.2-108 can be connected to the inner frame 11.1.2-102 between the apertures 11.1.2-106a-b such that the cantilevered arms 11.1.2-112, 11.1.2-114 extend downward and laterally outward away from the intermediate portion 11.1.2-109 to complement the shape of the nose bridge 11.1.2-111 of the outer frame 11.1.2-104. In this manner, the mounting bracket 11.1.2-108 is configured to accommodate the user's nose as described above. The shape of the nose bridge 11.1.2-111 accommodates the nose in that the nose bridge 11.1.2-111 provides a curvature that curves with, over, on and around the user's nose for comfort and fit.

[0125] The first cantilevered arm 11.1.2-112 can extend in a first direction away from the intermediate portion 11.1.2-109 of the mounting bracket 11.1.2-108, and the second cantilevered arm 11.1.2-114 can extend in a second direction opposite the first direction away from the intermediate portion 11.1.2-109 of the mounting bracket 11.1.2-10. The first and second cantilevered arms 11.1.2-112, 11.1.2-114 are referred to as "cantilevered" or "cantilever" arms because each arm 11.1.2-112, 11.1.2-114 includes a distal free end 11.1.2-116, 11.1.2-118, respectively, that is not secured to the inner and outer frames 11.1.2-102, 11.1.2-104. In this way, the arms 11.1.2-112, 11.1.2-114 are cantilevered from intermediate portions 11.1.2-109 which may be connected to the inner frame 11.1.2-104 with the distal ends 11.1.2-102, 11.1.2-104 unattached.

[0126] In at least one example, the HMD 11.1.2-100 can include one or more components coupled to the mounting bracket 11.1.2-108. In one example, the components include a plurality of sensors 11.1.2-110a-f. Each sensor of the plurality of sensors 11.1.2-110a-f can include various types of sensors, including cameras, IR sensors, etc. In some examples, one or more of the sensors 11.1.2-110a-f can be used for object recognition in three-dimensional space, such that maintaining accurate relative positions of two or more of the plurality of sensors 11.1.2-110a-f is important. The cantilevered nature of the mounting bracket 11.1.2-108 can protect the sensors 11.1.2-110a-f from damage and repositioning in the event of an accidental drop by the user. Because the sensors 11.1.2-110a-f are cantilevered onto the arms 11.1.2-112, 11.1.2-114 of the mounting bracket 11.1.2-108, stresses and deformations of the inner and / or outer frames 11.1.2-104, 11.1.2-102 are not transferred to the cantilevered arms 11.1.2-112, 11.1.2-114 and therefore do not affect the relative positioning of the sensors 11.1.2-110a-f coupled / attached to the mounting bracket 11.1.2-108.

[0127] Any of the features, components, and / or parts shown in Figure 1N, including their arrangement and configuration, alone or in any combination, may be included in any of the other example devices, features, and parts described herein. Similarly, any of the features, components, and / or parts shown and described herein, including their arrangement and configuration, alone or in any combination, may be included in the example devices, features, components, and parts shown in Figure 1N.

[0128] FIG. 10 illustrates an example of an optical module 11.3.2-100 for use in an electronic device, such as an HMD, including the HDM device described herein. As shown in one or more other examples described herein, optical module 11.3.2-100 may be one of two optical modules in an HMD, each aligned to project light toward a user's eye. In this manner, a first optical module can project light toward a first eye of a user through a display screen, and a second optical module of the same device can project light toward a second eye of the user through another display screen.

[0129] In at least one example, the optical module 11.3.2-100 can include an optical frame or housing 11.3.2-102, which can also be referred to as a barrel or optical module barrel. The optical module 11.3.2-100 can also include a display 11.3.2-104, including a display screen or multiple display screens, coupled to the housing 11.3.2-102. The display 11.3.2-104 can be coupled to the housing 11.3.2-102 such that the display 11.3.2-104 is configured to project light toward a user's eyes when the HMD of which the display module 11.3.2-100 is a part is worn during use. In at least one example, the housing 11.3.2-102 can surround the display 11.3.2-104 and provide a connection mechanism for coupling other components of the optical module described herein.

[0130] In one example, the optical module 11.3.2-100 may include one or more cameras 11.3.2-106 coupled to the housing 11.3.2-102. The cameras 11.3.2-106 may be positioned relative to the display 11.3.2-104 and the housing 11.3.2-102 such that the cameras 11.3.2-106 are configured to capture one or more images of a user's eyes during use. In at least one example, the optical module 11.3.2-100 may also include a light strip 11.3.2-108 surrounding the display 11.3.2-104. In one example, the light strip 11.3.2-108 is disposed between the display 11.3.2-104 and the camera 11.3.2-106. The light strip 11.3.2-108 may include a plurality of lights 11.3.2-110. The plurality of lights may include one or more light-emitting diodes (LEDs) or other lights configured to project light toward the user's eyes when the HMD is worn. The individual lights 11.3.2-110 of the light strip 11.3.2-108 may be spaced around the strip 11.3.2-108 and thus may be evenly or unevenly spaced around the display 11.3.2-104 at various locations on the strip 11.3.2-108 and around the display 11.3.2-104.

[0131] In at least one example, the housing 11.3.2-102 defines a viewing opening 11.3.2-101 through which a user can view the display 11.3.2-104 when the HMD device is worn. In at least one example, the LEDs are configured and arranged to emit light onto the user's eyes through the viewing opening 11.3.2-101. In one example, the camera 11.3.2-106 is configured to capture one or more images of the user's eyes through the viewing opening 11.3.2-101.

[0132] As mentioned above, each of the components and features of optical module 11.3.2-100 shown in FIG. 1O may be replicated in another (e.g., a second) optical module disposed with the HMD to interact with the user's other eye (e.g., project light and capture images).

[0133] Any of the features, components, and / or parts shown in Figure 1O, including their arrangement and configuration, alone or in any combination, may be included in any of the other example devices, features, components, and parts shown in Figure 1P or otherwise described herein. Similarly, any of the features, components, and / or parts shown and described with reference to Figure 1P or otherwise described herein, including their arrangement and configuration, alone or in any combination, may be included in the example devices, features, components, and parts shown in Figure 1O.

[0134] 1P illustrates a cross-sectional view of an example optical module 11.3.2-200 including a housing 11.3.2-202, a display assembly 11.3.2-204 coupled to the housing 11.3.2-202, and a lens 11.3.2-216 coupled to the housing 11.3.2-202. In at least one example, the housing 11.3.2-202 defines a first aperture or channel 11.3.2-212 and a second aperture or channel 11.3.2-214. The channels 11.3.2-212, 11.3.2-214 may be configured to slidably engage respective rails or guide rods of an HMD device to enable the optical module 11.3.2-200 to be positioned relative to a user's eyes to match the user's inter-papillary distance (IPD). The housing 11.3.2-202 can slidably engage guide rods to secure the optical module 11.3.2-200 in place within the HMD.

[0135] In at least one example, the optical module 11.3.2-200 may also include a lens 11.3.2-216 coupled to the housing 11.3.2-202 and disposed between the display assembly 11.3.2-204 and the user's eyes when the HMD is worn. The lens 11.3.2-216 may be configured to direct light from the display assembly 11.3.2-204 toward the user's eyes. In at least one example, the lens 11.3.2-216 may be part of a lens assembly that includes a corrective lens removably attached to the optical module 11.3.2-200. In at least one example, the lens 11.3.2-216 is disposed over the light strip 11.3.2-208 and one or more eye tracking cameras 11.3.2-206, such that the camera 11.3.2-206 is configured to capture images of the user's eyes through the lens 11.3.2-216, and the light strip 11.3.2-208 includes lights configured to project light into the user's eyes through the lens 11.3.2-216 during use.

[0136] Any of the features, components, and / or parts shown in Figure 1P, including their arrangement and configuration, alone or in any combination, may be included in any of the other example devices, features, components, and parts described herein. Similarly, any of the features, components, and / or parts shown and described herein, including their arrangement and configuration, alone or in any combination, may be included in the example devices, features, components, and parts shown in Figure 1P.

[0137] 2 is a block diagram of an example controller 110, according to some embodiments. While certain features are shown, those skilled in the art will understand from this disclosure that various other features are not shown for the sake of brevity so as not to obscure more pertinent aspects of the embodiments disclosed herein. Thus, by way of non-limiting example, in some embodiments, the controller 110 includes one or more processing units 202 (e.g., a microprocessor, an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA), a graphics processing unit (GPU), a central processing unit (CPU), a processing core, etc.), one or more input / output (I / O) devices 206, one or more communication interfaces 208 (e.g., Universal Serial Bus (USB), FIREWIRE, THUNDERBOLT, IEEE 802.3x, IEEE 802.11x, IEEE 802.16x, Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM), Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA), Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA), Global Positioning System (GPS), Infrared (IR), BLUETOOTH, ZIGBEE, or similar types of interfaces), one or more programming (e.g., I / O) interfaces 210, memory 220, and one or more communication buses 204 for interconnecting these and various other components.

[0138] In some embodiments, one or more communication buses 204 include circuitry that interconnects and controls communication between system components. In some embodiments, one or more I / O devices 206 include at least one of a keyboard, a mouse, a touchpad, a joystick, one or more microphones, one or more speakers, one or more image sensors, one or more displays, etc.

[0139] Memory 220 includes high-speed random-access memory, such as dynamic random-access memory (DRAM), static random-access memory (SRAM), double-data-rate random-access memory (DDRRAM), or other random-access solid-state memory devices. In some embodiments, memory 220 includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic storage devices, optical storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state storage devices. Memory 220 optionally includes one or more storage devices located remotely from the one or more processing units 202. Memory 220 includes a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium. In some embodiments, memory 220, or its non-transitory computer-readable storage medium, stores the following programs, modules, and data structures, or a subset thereof, including an optional operating system 230 and an XR experience module 240:

[0140] Operating system 230 includes instructions for handling various basic system services and performing hardware-dependent tasks. In some embodiments, XR experience module 240 is configured to manage and coordinate one or more XR experiences for one or more users (e.g., a single XR experience for one or more users, or multiple XR experiences for respective groups of one or more users). To that end, in various embodiments, XR experience module 240 includes a data acquisition unit 241, a tracking unit 242, an adjustment unit 246, and a data transmission unit 248.

[0141] 1A , and optionally one or more of input device 125, output device 155, sensor 190, and / or peripheral device 195. To that end, in various embodiments, data acquisition unit 241 includes instructions and / or logic therefor, as well as heuristics and metadata therefor.

[0142] In some embodiments, tracking unit 242 is configured to map scene 105 and track the position / location of at least display generating component 120 relative to scene 105 of FIG. 1A , and optionally relative to one or more of input device 125, output device 155, sensor 190, and / or peripheral device 195. To that end, in various embodiments, tracking unit 242 includes instructions and / or logic therefor, as well as heuristics and metadata therefor. In some embodiments, tracking unit 242 includes hand tracking unit 244 and / or eye tracking unit 243. In some embodiments, hand tracking unit 244 is configured to track the position / location of one or more parts of a user's hand and / or the movement of one or more parts of a user's hand relative to scene 105 of FIG. 1A , relative to display generating component 120, and / or relative to a coordinate system defined relative to the user's hand. Hand tracking unit 244 is described in more detail below with respect to FIG. 4. In some embodiments, eye tracking unit 243 is configured to track the position and movement of the user's gaze (or, more broadly, the user's eyes, face, or head) relative to scene 105 (e.g., relative to the physical environment and / or the user (e.g., the user's hands)), or relative to XR content displayed via display generation component 120. Eye tracking unit 243 is described in more detail below with respect to FIG. 5.

[0143] In some embodiments, coordination unit 246 is configured to manage and coordinate the XR experience presented to the user by display generation component 120 and, optionally, by one or more of output devices 155 and / or peripheral devices 195. To that end, in various embodiments, coordination unit 246 includes instructions and / or logic therefor, as well as heuristics and metadata therefor.

[0144] In some embodiments, data transmission unit 248 is configured to transmit data (e.g., presentation data, location data, etc.) to at least display generation component 120, and optionally to one or more of input device 125, output device 155, sensor 190, and / or peripheral device 195. To that end, in various embodiments, data transmission unit 248 includes instructions and / or logic therefor, as well as heuristics and metadata therefor.

[0145] Although the data acquisition unit 241, the tracking unit 242 (e.g., including the eye tracking unit 243 and the hand tracking unit 244), the adjustment unit 246, and the data transmission unit 248 are shown as being present on a single device (e.g., the controller 110), it should be understood that in other embodiments, any combination of the data acquisition unit 241, the tracking unit 242 (e.g., including the eye tracking unit 243 and the hand tracking unit 244), the adjustment unit 246, and the data transmission unit 248 can be located within separate computing devices.

[0146] Furthermore, Figure 2 is intended more to illustrate the functionality of various features that may be present in particular embodiments, as opposed to a structural overview of the embodiments described herein. As will be recognized by those skilled in the art, items shown separately can be combined and some items can be separated. For example, some functional modules shown separately in Figure 2 can be implemented in a single module, and various functions of a single functional block can be implemented by one or more functional blocks in various embodiments. The actual number of modules, as well as the division of specific functions and how functions are allocated among them, will vary depending on implementation and, in some embodiments, will depend in part on the particular combination of hardware, software, and / or firmware selected for a particular implementation.

[0147] 3 is a block diagram of an example of a display generation component 120, according to some embodiments. While certain features are shown, those skilled in the art will understand from this disclosure that, for the sake of brevity, various other features are not shown so as to not obscure more pertinent aspects of the embodiments disclosed herein. To that end, by way of non-limiting example, in some embodiments, the display generation component 120 (e.g., an HMD) includes one or more processing units 302 (e.g., microprocessors, ASICs, FPGAs, GPUs, CPUs, processing cores, etc.), one or more input / output (I / O) devices and sensors 306, one or more communication interfaces 308 (e.g., USB, FIREWIRE, THUNDERBOLT, IEEE 802.3x, IEEE 802.11x, IEEE 802.16x, GSM, CDMA, TDMA, GPS, infrared, BLUETOOTH, ZIGBEE, and / or similar types of interfaces), one or more programming (e.g., I / O) interfaces 310, one or more XR displays 312, one or more optional inward-facing and / or outward-facing image sensors 314, memory 320, and one or more communication buses 304 for interconnecting these and various other components.

[0148] In some embodiments, the one or more communication buses 304 include circuitry that interconnects and controls communications between system components. In some embodiments, the one or more I / O devices and sensors 306 include at least one of an inertial measurement unit (IMU), an accelerometer, a gyroscope, a thermometer, one or more physiological sensors (e.g., a blood pressure monitor, a heart rate monitor, a blood oxygen sensor, a blood glucose sensor, etc.), one or more microphones, one or more speakers, a haptic engine, one or more depth sensors (e.g., structured light, time of flight, etc.), etc.

[0149] In some embodiments, the one or more XR displays 312 are configured to provide an XR experience to a user. In some embodiments, the one or more XR displays 312 correspond to holographic, digital light processing (DLP), liquid crystal display (LCD), liquid crystal on silicon (LCoS), organic light-emitting field-effect transistor (OLET), organic light-emitting diode (OLED), surface-conduction electron-emissive element display (SED), field-emission display (FED), quantum dot light-emitting diode (QD-LED), MEMS, and / or similar display types. In some embodiments, the one or more XR displays 312 correspond to a waveguide display, such as a diffractive, reflective, polarized, holographic, etc. For example, the display generation component 120 (e.g., an HMD) includes a single XR display. In another example, the display generation component 120 includes an XR display for each eye of the user. In some embodiments, the one or more XR displays 312 are capable of presenting mixed reality (MR) or virtual reality (VR) content. In some embodiments, the one or more XR displays 312 are capable of presenting mixed reality (MR) or virtual reality (VR) content.

[0150] In some embodiments, the one or more image sensors 314 are configured to acquire image data corresponding to at least a portion of the user's face, including the user's eyes (and may be referred to as eye-tracking cameras). In some embodiments, the one or more image sensors 314 are configured to acquire image data corresponding to at least a portion of the user's hand(s) and optionally the user's arm(s) (and may be referred to as hand-tracking cameras). In some embodiments, the one or more image sensors 314 are configured to face forward to acquire image data corresponding to a scene as the user would view it if the display generating component 120 (e.g., an HMD) were not present (and may be referred to as a scene camera). The one or more optional image sensors 314 may include one or more RGB cameras (e.g., with a complementary metal-oxide semiconductor (CMOS) image sensor or a charge-coupled device (CCD) image sensor), one or more infrared (IR) cameras, one or more event-based cameras, and / or the like.

[0151] Memory 320 includes high-speed random-access memory, such as DRAM, SRAM, DDR RAM, or other random-access solid-state memory devices. In some embodiments, memory 320 includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, optical disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state storage devices. Memory 320 optionally includes one or more storage devices located remotely from the one or more processing units 302. Memory 320 includes a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium. In some embodiments, memory 320, or its non-transitory computer-readable storage medium, stores the following programs, modules, and data structures, or a subset thereof, including an optional operating system 330 and an XR presentation module 340:

[0152] The operating system 330 includes instructions for handling various basic system services and for performing hardware-dependent tasks. In some embodiments, the XR presentation module 340 is configured to present XR content to a user via one or more XR displays 312. To that end, in various embodiments, the XR presentation module 340 includes a data acquisition unit 342, an XR presentation unit 344, an XR map generation unit 346, and a data transmission unit 348.

[0153] In some embodiments, the data acquisition unit 342 is configured to acquire data (e.g., presentation data, interaction data, sensor data, location data, etc.) from at least the controller 110 of Figure 1A. To that end, in various embodiments, the data acquisition unit 342 includes instructions and / or logic therefor, as well as heuristics and metadata therefor.

[0154] In some embodiments, the XR presentation unit 344 is configured to present XR content via one or more XR displays 312. To that end, in various embodiments, the XR presentation unit 344 includes instructions and / or logic therefor, as well as heuristics and metadata therefor.

[0155] In some embodiments, the XR map generation unit 346 is configured to generate an XR map (e.g., a 3D map of a mixed reality scene or a map of a physical environment in which computer-generated objects can be placed to generate an extended reality) based on the media content data. To that end, in various embodiments, the XR map generation unit 346 includes instructions and / or logic therefor, as well as heuristics and metadata therefor.

[0156] In some embodiments, data transmission unit 348 is configured to transmit data (e.g., presentation data, location data, etc.) to at least controller 110, and optionally to one or more of input device 125, output device 155, sensor 190, and / or peripheral device 195. To that end, in various embodiments, data transmission unit 348 includes instructions and / or logic therefor, as well as heuristics and metadata therefor.

[0157] Although the data acquisition unit 342, the XR presentation unit 344, the XR map generation unit 346, and the data transmission unit 348 are shown as residing on a single device (e.g., the display generation component 120 of FIG. 1A), it should be understood that in other embodiments, any combination of the data acquisition unit 342, the XR presentation unit 344, the XR map generation unit 346, and the data transmission unit 348 may be located within separate computing devices.

[0158] Furthermore, Figure 3 is intended more to illustrate the functionality of various features that may be present in particular implementations, as opposed to a structural overview of the embodiments described herein. As will be recognized by those skilled in the art, items shown separately can be combined and some items can be separated. For example, some functional modules shown separately in Figure 3 can be implemented within a single module, and various functions of a single functional block can be performed by one or more functional blocks in various embodiments. The actual number of modules, as well as the division of specific functions and how functions are allocated among them, will vary from implementation to implementation and, in some embodiments, will depend in part on the particular combination of hardware, software, and / or firmware selected for a particular implementation.

[0159] 4 is a schematic diagram of an example embodiment of a hand tracking device 140. In some embodiments, hand tracking device 140 (FIG. 1A) is controlled by hand tracking unit 244 (FIG. 2) to track the position / location of one or more parts of a user's hand and / or the movement of one or more parts of a user's hand relative to scene 105 of FIG. 1A (e.g., relative to parts of the physical environment surrounding the user, relative to display generating component 120, or relative to parts of the user (e.g., the user's face, eyes, or head), and / or relative to a coordinate system defined relative to the user's hand). In some embodiments, hand tracking device 140 is part of display generating component 120 (e.g., embedded in or attached to a head-mounted device). In some embodiments, hand tracking device 140 is separate from display generating component 120 (e.g., located in a separate housing or attached to a separate physical support structure).

[0160] In some embodiments, the hand tracking device 140 includes an image sensor 404 (e.g., one or more IR cameras, 3D cameras, depth cameras, and / or color cameras) that captures three-dimensional scene information including at least the hand 406 of a human user. The image sensor 404 captures hand images with sufficient resolution to allow for differentiation of the fingers and their respective positions. The image sensor 404 typically captures images of other parts of the user's body, or all of the body, and can have either zoom capabilities or a dedicated sensor with high magnification to capture hand images at a desired resolution. In some embodiments, the image sensor 404 also captures 2D color video images of the hand 406 and other elements of the scene. In some embodiments, the image sensor 404 is used in conjunction with or functions as an image sensor that captures the physical environment of the scene 105. In some embodiments, the image sensor 404 is positioned relative to the user or the user's environment such that the field of view of the image sensor, or a portion thereof, is used to define an interaction space in which hand movements captured by the image sensor are processed as inputs to the controller 110.

[0161] In some embodiments, image sensor 404 outputs a sequence of frames containing 3D map data (and possibly color image data) to controller 110, which extracts high-level information from the map data. This high-level information is typically provided via an application program interface (API) to an application running on the controller, which drives display generation component 120 accordingly. For example, a user can interact with software running on controller 110 by moving their hand 406 and changing the posture of their hand.

[0162] In some embodiments, the image sensor 404 projects a spot pattern onto a scene including the hand 406 and captures an image of the projected pattern. In some embodiments, the controller 110 calculates the 3D coordinates of points in the scene (including points on the surface of the user's hand) by triangulation based on the lateral shift of the spots of the pattern. This approach is advantageous in that it does not require the user to hold or wear any type of beacon, sensor, or other marker. This provides depth coordinates of points in the scene relative to a predetermined reference plane at a specific distance from the image sensor 404. In this disclosure, the image sensor 404 is assumed to define an orthogonal set of x, y, and z axes such that the depth coordinate of a point in the scene corresponds to the z component measured by the image sensor. Alternatively, the image sensor 404 (e.g., a hand tracking device) can use other 3D mapping methods, such as stereoscopic imaging or time-of-flight measurements, based on single or multiple cameras or other types of sensors.

[0163] In some embodiments, the hand tracking device 140 captures and processes a time sequence of depth maps containing the user's hand while the user moves the hand (e.g., the entire hand or one or more fingers). Software running on the image sensor 404 and / or a processor in the controller 110 processes the 3D map data to extract patch descriptors of the hand in these depth maps. The software matches these descriptors to patch descriptors stored in the database 408, based on a previous training process, to estimate the pose of the hand in each frame. The pose typically includes the 3D locations of the user's wrist joints and fingertips.

[0164] The software can also analyze hand and / or finger trajectories across multiple frames in a sequence to identify gestures. The pose estimation functionality described herein may be interleaved with motion tracking functionality, whereby patch-based pose estimation is performed only once every two (or more) frames, while tracking is used to discover pose changes that occur across the remaining frames. The pose, motion, and gesture information is provided to an application program running on controller 110 via the API described above. This program can, for example, move and modify an image presented on display generation component 120 or perform other functions in response to the pose and / or gesture information.

[0165] In some embodiments, the gesture includes an air gesture, which is detected without (or independent of) the user touching an input element that is part of a device (e.g., computer system 101, one or more input devices 125, and / or hand tracking device 140) and is based on detected movement of a part of the user's body in the air (e.g., head, one or more arms, one or more hands, one or more fingers, and / or one or more legs), including movement of the user's body relative to an absolute reference (e.g., the angle of the user's arm relative to the ground or the distance of the user's hand relative to the ground), movement of the user's body relative to another part of the user's body (e.g., movement of the user's hand relative to the user's shoulder, movement of one of the user's hands relative to another of the user's hands, and / or movement of a user's finger relative to another finger or part of the user's hand), and / or absolute movement of the user's body part (e.g., a tap gesture involving movement of a hand in a predetermined posture by a predetermined amount and / or speed, or a shake gesture involving a predetermined speed or amount of rotation of the user's body part).

[0166] In some embodiments, input gestures used in various examples and embodiments described herein include air gestures performed by movement of a user's finger(s) relative to other finger(s) or part(s) of the user's hand to interact with an XR environment (e.g., a virtual or mixed reality environment), according to some embodiments. In some embodiments, an air gesture is a gesture that is detected without the user touching an input element that is part of the device (or independent of an input element that is part of the device) and is based on detected movement of a part of the user's body in the air, including movement of the user's body relative to an absolute reference (e.g., the angle of the user's arm relative to the ground or the distance of the user's hand relative to the ground), movement of the user's body relative to another part of the user's body (e.g., movement of the user's hand relative to the user's shoulder, movement of the user's other hand relative to one of the user's hands, and / or movement of the user's fingers relative to another finger or part of the user's hand), and / or absolute movement of the user's body part (e.g., a tap gesture that includes movement of the hand in a predetermined pose by a predetermined amount and / or speed, or a shake gesture that includes rotation of the user's body part at a predetermined speed or amount).

[0167] In some embodiments where the input gesture is an air gesture (e.g., in the absence of physical contact with an input device that provides a computer system with information about which user interface element is the target of the user input, such as contact with a user interface element displayed on a touchscreen or contact with a mouse or trackpad to move a cursor to a user interface element), the gesture takes into account the user's attention (e.g., gaze) to determine the target of the user input (e.g., in the case of direct input, as described below). Thus, in implementations that include air gestures, the input gesture is detected attention (e.g., gaze) to a user interface element in combination with (e.g., simultaneous with) movement of the user's finger(s) and / or hand to perform pinch and / or tap input, as described in more detail below.

[0168] In some embodiments, an input gesture directed at a user interface object is performed directly or indirectly with reference to the user interface object. For example, user input is performed directly at a user interface object in response to performing an input gesture with the user's hand at a position corresponding to the user interface object's position in the three-dimensional environment (e.g., as determined based on the user's current viewpoint). In some embodiments, an input gesture is performed indirectly at a user interface object in response to detecting the user's attention (e.g., gaze) to the user interface object while performing the input gesture while the user's hand position is not at a position corresponding to the user interface object's position in the three-dimensional environment. For example, for a direct input gesture, a user can direct the user's input at a user interface object by initiating the gesture at or near a position corresponding to the user interface object's displayed position (e.g., within a distance of 0.5 cm, 1 cm, 5 cm, or 0-5 cm, measured from an outer edge of the option or a central portion of the option). For indirect input gestures, a user can direct their input to a user interface object by paying attention to the user interface object (e.g., by gazing at the user interface object), and while paying attention to the option, the user initiates an input gesture (e.g., at any position detectable by the computer system) (e.g., at a position that does not correspond to the displayed position of the user interface object).

[0169] In some embodiments, input gestures (e.g., air gestures) used in various examples and embodiments described herein include pinch inputs and tap inputs for interacting with a virtual or mixed reality environment, according to some embodiments. For example, pinch inputs and tap inputs, as described below, are performed as air gestures.

[0170] In some embodiments, the pinch input is part of an air gesture, including one or more of a pinch gesture, a long pinch gesture, a pinch-and-drag gesture, or a double pinch gesture. For example, a pinch gesture that is an air gesture includes moving two or more fingers of a hand to contact each other, i.e., optionally with a short break (e.g., within 0-1 second) after contact with each other. A long pinch gesture that is an air gesture includes moving two or more fingers of a hand to contact each other for at least a threshold amount of time (e.g., at least 1 second) before detecting a break in contact with each other. For example, a long pinch gesture includes a user holding a pinch gesture (e.g., when two or more fingers are in contact), and the long pinch gesture continues until a break in contact between the two or more fingers is detected. In some embodiments, a double pinch gesture that is an air gesture includes two (e.g., or more) pinch inputs (e.g., performed by the same hand) that are detected immediately in succession (e.g., within a predetermined period of time) after each other. For example, a user performs a first pinch input (e.g., a pinch input or a long pinch input), releases the first pinch input (e.g., breaking contact between two or more fingers), and performs a second pinch input within a predetermined period of time (e.g., within 1 second or 2 seconds) after releasing the first pinch input.

[0171] In some embodiments, a pinch-and-drag gesture that is an air gesture (e.g., an air drag gesture or an air swipe gesture) includes a pinch gesture (e.g., a pinch gesture or a long pinch gesture) performed in conjunction with (e.g., after) a drag input that changes the position of the user's hand from a first position (e.g., a start position of the drag) to a second position (e.g., an end position of the drag). In some embodiments, the user maintains the pinch gesture while performing the drag input and releases the pinch gesture (e.g., two or more fingers apart) to end the drag gesture (e.g., at the second position). In some embodiments, the pinch input and the drag input are performed with the same hand (e.g., the user pinches two or more fingers together and moves the same hand to the second position in the air with a drag gesture). In some embodiments, the pinch input is performed with a first hand of the user, and the drag input is performed with a second hand of the user (e.g., the user's second hand moves from a first position to a second position in the air while the user continues to perform the pinch input with the user's first hand). In some embodiments, an input gesture that is an air gesture includes an input (e.g., a pinch input and / or a tap input) performed using both of the user's hands. For example, the input gesture includes two (e.g., or more) pinch inputs performed in conjunction with each other (e.g., simultaneously or within a predetermined period of time). For example, a first pinch gesture (e.g., a pinch input, a long pinch input, or a pinch and drag input) performed using a first hand of the user, and a second pinch input performed using the other hand (e.g., a second hand of the user's both hands) in conjunction with performing the pinch input using the first hand.

[0172] In some embodiments, a tap input (e.g., directed toward a user interface element) performed as an air gesture includes movement(s) of a user's finger(s) toward the user interface element, movement of a user's hand toward a user interface element, optionally with the user's finger(s) extended toward the user interface element, a downward movement of a user's finger (e.g., mimicking a mouse click action or a tap on a touchscreen), or other predefined movement of the user's hand. In some embodiments, a tap input performed as an air gesture is detected based on movement characteristics of the finger or hand performing the tap gesture, moving the finger or hand away from the user's viewpoint and / or toward the object that is the target of the tap input followed by an end of the movement. In some embodiments, an end of the movement is detected based on a change in movement characteristics of the finger or hand performing the tap gesture (e.g., an end of movement away from the user's viewpoint and / or toward the object that is the target of the tap input, a reversal of the direction of movement of the finger or hand, and / or a reversal of the direction of acceleration of the movement of the finger or hand).

[0173] In some embodiments, the user's attention is determined to be directed to a portion of the three-dimensional environment based on detecting a gaze directed to the portion of the three-dimensional environment (optionally, without requiring other conditions). In some embodiments, the device determines that the user's attention is directed to the portion of the three-dimensional environment based on detecting a gaze directed to the portion of the three-dimensional environment with one or more additional conditions, such as requiring the gaze to be directed to the portion of the three-dimensional environment for at least a threshold duration (e.g., dwell time) while the user's viewpoint is within a distance threshold from the portion of the three-dimensional environment, and / or requiring the gaze to be directed to the portion of the three-dimensional environment, and if one of the additional conditions is not met, the device determines that the user's attention is not directed to the portion of the three-dimensional environment to which the gaze is directed (e.g., until one or more additional conditions are met).

[0174] In some embodiments, detection of a ready configuration of a user or a portion of a user is detected by a computer system, and detection of a ready configuration of the hands is used by the computer system as an indication that the user is likely preparing to interact with the computer system using one or more air gesture inputs performed with the hands (e.g., pinch, tap, pinch and drag, double pinch, long pinch, or other air gestures described herein). For example, the ready state of a hand is determined based on whether the hand has a predetermined hand geometry (e.g., a pre-pinch geometry with the thumb and one or more fingers extended and spaced apart, ready to perform a pinch or grab gesture, or a pre-tap geometry with one or more fingers extended and the palm facing away from the user), whether the hand is in a predetermined position relative to the user's viewpoint (e.g., below the user's head, above the user's waist, extended at least 15 cm, 20 cm, 25 cm, 30 cm, or 50 cm from the body), and / or whether the hand has moved in a particular manner (e.g., above the user's waist, moved toward an area in front of the user below the user's head, or away from the user's body or legs). In some embodiments, the ready state is used to determine whether an interactive element of a user interface is responsive to attentional (e.g., gaze) input.

[0175] In scenarios where input is described with reference to air gestures, it should be understood that similar gestures can also be detected using a hardware input device attached to or held by one or more of the user's hands, where the position of the hardware input device in space can be tracked using optical tracking, one or more accelerometers, one or more gyroscopes, one or more magnetometers, and / or one or more inertial measurement units, and where the position and / or movement of the hardware input device is substituted for the position and / or movement of the one or more hands in the corresponding air gesture(s). It should be understood that in scenarios where input is described with reference to air gestures, similar gestures can also be detected using a hardware input device attached to or held by one or more of the user's hands. User input can be detected using controls included in a hardware input device, such as one or more touch-sensitive input elements, one or more pressure-sensitive input elements, one or more buttons, one or more knobs, one or more dials, one or more joysticks, one or more hand or finger covers capable of detecting the position or change in position of parts of the hands and / or fingers relative to each other, relative to the user's body, and / or relative to the user's physical environment, and / or other hardware input device controls, where user input using controls included in a hardware input device is used in place of a hand and / or finger gesture, such as an air tap or air pinch, in a corresponding air gesture(s). For example, a selection input described as being made with an air tap or air pinch input can alternatively be detected with a button press, a tap on a touch-sensitive surface, a press on a pressure-sensitive surface, or other hardware input.As another example, a movement input described as being performed with an air pinch and drag (e.g., an air drag gesture or an air swipe gesture) may alternatively be detected based on an interaction with a hardware input control, such as a press and hold of a button, a touch on a touch-sensitive surface, a press on a pressure-sensitive surface, or based on a hardware input followed by the movement of another hardware input device in space (e.g., accompanying the hand with which the hardware input device is associated). Similarly, a two-handed input, including the movement of both hands relative to each other, may be performed using one air gesture and one hardware input device held in the hand not performing the air gesture, two hardware input devices held in separate hands, or two air gestures performed by separate hands, using various combinations of air gestures and / or input detected by one or more of the hardware input devices described above.

[0176] In some embodiments, the software may be downloaded to the controller 110 in electronic form, for example, over a network, or alternatively may be provided on a tangible, non-transitory medium, such as an optical, magnetic, or electronic memory medium. In some embodiments, the database 408 is similarly stored in memory associated with the controller 110. Alternatively, or additionally, some or all of the described functionality of the computer may be implemented in dedicated hardware, such as a custom or semi-custom integrated circuit or a programmable digital signal processor (DSP). While the controller 110 is shown in FIG. 4 as, by way of example, a separate unit from the image sensor 404, some or all of the processing functionality of the controller may be implemented by a suitable microprocessor and software, or by dedicated circuitry within the housing of the image sensor 404 (e.g., a hand tracking device), or otherwise associated with the image sensor 404. In some embodiments, at least some of these processing functions may be performed by a suitable processor integrated with the display generation component 120 (e.g., in a television set, handheld device, or head-mounted device) or using any other suitable computerized device, such as a game console or media player. The sensing function of the image sensor 404 may likewise be integrated into a computer or other computerized device that is controlled by the sensor output.

[0177] FIG. 4 also includes a schematic diagram of a depth map 410 captured by the image sensor 404, according to some embodiments. The depth map includes a matrix of pixels having respective depth values, as described above. A pixel 412 corresponding to the hand 406 is segmented from the background and wrist in this map. The intensity of each pixel in the depth map 410 is inversely proportional to the depth value, i.e., the measured z-distance from the image sensor 404, with increasing depth resulting in darker shades. The controller 110 processes these depth values ​​to identify and segment components of the image (i.e., groups of adjacent pixels) that have characteristics of a human hand. These characteristics can include, for example, the overall size, shape, and frame-to-frame motion of the depth map sequence.

[0178] 4 also schematically illustrates a hand skeleton 414 that the controller 110 ultimately extracts from the depth map 410 of the hand 406, according to some embodiments. In FIG. 4, the hand skeleton 414 is overlaid on a hand background 416 that was segmented from the original depth map. In some embodiments, key feature points on the hand (e.g., knuckles, fingertips, center of the palm, end of the hand where it connects to the wrist, etc.), and optionally the wrist or arm connected to the hand, are identified and positioned on the hand skeleton 414. In some embodiments, the location and movement of these key feature points over multiple image frames are used by the controller 110 to determine hand gestures performed by the hand or the current state of the hand, according to some embodiments.

[0179] FIG. 5 shows an exemplary embodiment of eye tracking device 130 ( FIG. 1A ). In some embodiments, eye tracking device 130 is controlled by eye tracking unit 243 ( FIG. 2 ) to track the position and movement of a user's gaze relative to scene 105 or relative to XR content displayed via display generation component 120. In some embodiments, eye tracking device 130 is integrated with display generation component 120. For example, in some embodiments, if display generation component 120 is a head-mounted device such as a headset, helmet, goggles, or glasses, or a handheld device disposed in a wearable frame, the head-mounted device includes both components for generating XR content for viewing by the user and components for tracking the user's gaze relative to the XR content. In some embodiments, eye tracking device 130 is separate from display generation component 120. For example, if the display generation component is a handheld device or an XR chamber, eye tracking device 130 is optionally a device separate from the handheld device or the XR chamber. In some embodiments, eye tracking device 130 is a head-mounted device or part of a head-mounted device. In some embodiments, head-mounted eye tracking device 130 is optionally used in conjunction with head-mounted or non-head-mounted display generating components. In some embodiments, eye tracking device 130 is not a head-mounted device, and is optionally used in combination with head-mounted display generating components. In some embodiments, eye tracking device 130 is not a head-mounted device, and is optionally part of non-head-mounted display generating components.

[0180] In some embodiments, the display generation component 120 uses a display mechanism (e.g., left and right near-eye display panels) that displays frames including left and right images in front of the user's eyes to provide the user with a 3D virtual view. For example, the head-mounted display generation component may include left and right optical lenses (referred to herein as eyepieces) positioned between the display and the user's eyes. In some embodiments, the display generation component may include or be coupled to one or more external video cameras that capture video of the user's environment for display. In some embodiments, the head-mounted display generation component may have a transparent or translucent display that allows the user to view the physical environment directly and display virtual objects on the transparent or translucent display. In some embodiments, the display generation component projects virtual objects into the physical environment. The virtual objects are projected, for example, onto a physical surface or as a hologram, allowing an individual using the system to observe the virtual objects superimposed on the physical environment. In such cases, separate display panels and image frames for the left and right eyes may not be required.

[0181] As shown in FIG. 5 , in some embodiments, eye tracking device 130 (e.g., gaze tracking device) includes at least one eye tracking camera (e.g., an infrared (IR) camera or near-IR (NIR) camera) and an illumination source (e.g., an IR or NIR light source such as an array or ring of LEDs) that emits light (e.g., IR or NIR light) toward the user's eyes. The eye tracking camera may be aimed at the user's eyes to receive reflected IR or NIR light from the light source directly from the eyes, or alternatively, may be aimed at a “hot” mirror positioned between the user's eyes and a display panel that reflects the IR or NIR light from the eyes to the eye tracking camera while allowing visible light to pass through. Eye tracking device 130 optionally captures images of the user's eyes (e.g., as a video stream captured at 60-120 frames per second (fps)), analyzes the images to generate eye tracking information, and communicates the eye tracking information to controller 110. In some embodiments, the user's eyes are tracked separately by their respective eye tracking cameras and illumination sources. In some embodiments, only one eye of the user is tracked by a separate eye-tracking camera and lighting source.

[0182] In some embodiments, the eye tracking device 130 is calibrated using a device-specific calibration process to determine the eye tracking device's parameters for the particular operating environment 100, such as the 3D geometric relationships and parameters of the LEDs, camera, hot mirror (if present), eyepiece, and display screen. The device-specific calibration process may be performed at a factory or another facility before delivery of the AR / VR equipment to the end user. The device-specific calibration process may be an automatic or manual calibration process. The user-specific calibration process may include estimation of a particular user's eye parameters, such as pupil location, central visual location, optical axis, visual axis, eye spacing, etc. According to some embodiments, once the device-specific and user-specific parameters for the eye tracking device 130 have been determined, images captured by the eye tracking camera can be processed using a glint-assisted method to determine the user's current visual axis and point of gaze relative to the display.

[0183] As shown in FIG. 5, eye tracking device 130 (e.g., 130A or 130B) includes an eyepiece(s) 520 and a gaze tracking system including at least one eye tracking camera 540 (e.g., an infrared (IR) or near-IR (NIR) camera) positioned on the side of the user's face where eye tracking occurs and an illumination source 530 (e.g., an IR or NIR light source such as an array or ring of NIR light emitting diodes (LEDs)) that emits light (e.g., IR or NIR light) toward the user's eye(s) 592. The eye tracking camera 540 may be positioned between the user's eye(s) 592 and the display 510 (e.g., the left or right display panel of a head-mounted display, or the display of a handheld device, a projector, etc.) and may be directed at a mirror 550 that reflects IR or NIR light from the eye(s) 592 while transmitting visible light (e.g., as shown at the top of FIG. 5), or may be directed at the user's eye(s) 592 to receive reflected IR or NIR light from the eye(s) 592 (e.g., as shown at the bottom of FIG. 5).

[0184] In some embodiments, controller 110 renders AR or VR frames 562 (e.g., left and right frames for left and right display panels) and provides frames 562 to display 510. Controller 110 uses gaze tracking input 542 from eye tracking camera 540 for various purposes, such as in processing frames 562 for display. Controller 110 optionally estimates the user's viewpoint on display 510 based on gaze tracking input 542 obtained from eye tracking camera 540, using a glint-assisted method or other suitable method. The viewpoint estimated from gaze tracking input 542 is optionally used to determine the direction the user is currently looking.

[0185] Some possible use cases of the user's current gaze direction are described below, but are not intended to be limiting. As an exemplary use case, the controller 110 can render virtual content differently based on the determined user's gaze direction. For example, the controller 110 may generate virtual content with higher resolution in a central visual area determined from the user's current gaze direction than in a peripheral area. As another example, the controller may position or move virtual content within a view based at least in part on the user's current gaze direction. As another example, the controller may display particular virtual content within a view based at least in part on the user's current gaze direction. As another exemplary use case in an AR application, the controller 110 can orient an external camera to capture the physical environment of the XR experience and focus in the determined direction. The external camera's autofocus mechanism can then focus on an object or surface within the environment the user is currently viewing on the display 510. As another exemplary use case, eyepiece 520 may be a focusable lens, and eye-tracking information is used by the controller to adjust the focus of eyepiece 520 so that the virtual object the user is currently looking at has the proper binocular coordination to match the convergence of the user's eyes 592. Controller 110 can utilize the eye-tracking information to orient and focus eyepiece 520 so that close objects the user is looking at appear at the correct distance.

[0186] In some embodiments, the eye tracking device is part of a head-mounted device that includes a display (e.g., display 510), two eyepieces (e.g., eyepiece 520), an eye tracking camera (e.g., eye tracking camera(s) 540), and a light source (e.g., illumination source 530 (e.g., IR or NIR LED)) mounted within a wearable housing. The light source emits light (e.g., IR light or NIR light) toward the user's eye(s) 592. In some embodiments, the light sources may be arranged in a ring or circle around each lens, as shown in FIG. 5. In some embodiments, as an example, eight illumination sources 530 (e.g., LEDs) are arranged around each lens 520. However, more or fewer illumination sources 530 may be used, and other arrangements and locations of the illumination sources 530 may be used.

[0187] In some embodiments, the display 510 emits light in the visible light range and not in the IR or NIR range, and therefore does not introduce noise into the gaze tracking system. Note that the location and angle of the eye tracking camera(s) 540 are given by way of example and are not intended to be limiting. In some embodiments, a single eye tracking camera 540 is located on each side of the user's face. In some embodiments, two or more NIR cameras 540 may be used on each side of the user's face. In some embodiments, a camera 540 with a wider field of view (FOV) and a camera 540 with a narrower FOV may be used on each side of the user's face. In some embodiments, a camera 540 operating at one wavelength (e.g., 850 nm) and a camera 540 operating at a different wavelength (e.g., 940 nm) may be used on each side of the user's face.

[0188] Embodiments of an eye tracking system such as that shown in FIG. 5 may be used, for example, in computer-generated reality, virtual reality, and / or mixed reality applications to provide a user with a computer-generated reality, virtual reality, augmented reality, and / or augmented virtual experience.

[0189] FIG. 6 illustrates a glint-assisted gaze tracking pipeline according to some embodiments. In some embodiments, the gaze tracking pipeline is implemented by a glint-assisted gaze tracking system (e.g., eye tracking device 130 as shown in FIGS. 1A and 5). The glint-assisted gaze tracking system can maintain a tracking state. Initially, the tracking state is off or "no." When in the tracking state, the glint-assisted gaze tracking system tracks the pupil contour and glint in the current frame using prior information from the previous frame when analyzing the current frame. When not in the tracking state, the glint-assisted gaze tracking system attempts to detect the pupil and glint in the current frame, and if successful, initializes the tracking state to "yes" and continues in the tracking state to the next frame.

[0190] As shown in FIG. 6, an eye-tracking camera can capture left and right images of a user's left and right eyes. The captured images are then input into an eye-tracking pipeline for processing beginning at 610. As indicated by the arrow returning to element 600, the eye-tracking system can continue to capture images of the user's eyes at a rate of, for example, 60-120 frames per second. In some embodiments, each set of captured images may be input into the pipeline for processing. However, in some embodiments, or under some conditions, not all captured frames are processed by the pipeline.

[0191] At 610, if the tracking status is yes for the currently captured image, the method proceeds to element 640. If the tracking status is no at 610, the image is analyzed to detect the user's pupil and glint in the image, as shown at 620. If the pupil and glint are successfully detected at 630, the method proceeds to element 640. If not, the method returns to element 610 to process the next image of the user's eyes.

[0192] At 640, proceeding from element 610, the current frame is analyzed to track pupils and glints based in part on previous information from the previous frame. At 640, proceeding from element 630, a tracking state is initialized based on the detected pupils and glints in the current frame. The results of the processing at element 640 are checked to ensure that the tracking or detection results are reliable. For example, the results can be checked to determine whether a sufficient number of glints are successfully tracked or detected in the current frame to perform pupil and gaze estimation. At 650, if the results are not reliable, the tracking state is set to no at element 660 and the method returns to element 610 to process the next image of the user's eyes. At 650, if the results are reliable, the method proceeds to element 670. At 670, the tracking state is set to yes (if not already yes) and the pupil and glint information is passed to element 680 to estimate the user's gaze point.

[0193] 6 is intended to serve as an example of eye-tracking technology that may be used in particular implementations. As will be recognized by those skilled in the art, other eye-tracking technologies, now existing or developed in the future, may be used in place of or in combination with the glint-assisted eye-tracking technology described herein in computer system 101 to provide a user with an XR experience according to various embodiments.

[0194] In some embodiments, the captured portion of the real-world environment 602 is used to provide the user with an XR experience, e.g., a mixed reality environment in which one or more virtual objects are overlaid on a representation of the real-world environment 602.

[0195] Accordingly, the description herein describes several embodiments of three-dimensional environments (e.g., XR environments) that include representations of real-world objects and representations of virtual objects. For example, the three-dimensional environment optionally includes a representation of a table present in a physical environment that is captured and displayed within the three-dimensional environment (e.g., actively via a camera and display of the computer system, or passively via a transparent or translucent display of the computer system). As described above, the three-dimensional environment is optionally a mixed reality system based on a physical environment, where the three-dimensional environment is captured by one or more sensors of the computer system and displayed via a display generation component. As a mixed reality system, the computer system can optionally selectively display portions and / or objects of the physical environment such that each portion and / or object of the physical environment appears to exist within the three-dimensional environment displayed by the computer system. Similarly, the computer system can optionally display virtual objects in the three-dimensional environment such that each portion and / or object of the physical environment appears to exist within the real world (e.g., the physical environment) by placing the virtual objects at respective locations within the three-dimensional environment that have corresponding locations in the real world. For example, the computer system optionally displays the vase so that it appears as if the real vase were placed on a table in the physical environment, hi some embodiments, distinct locations in the three-dimensional environment have corresponding locations in the physical environment.Thus, when a computer system is described as displaying a virtual object at a location distinct from a physical object (e.g., at or near the location of a user's hand, or on or near a physical table, etc.), the computer system displays the virtual object at a particular location in the three-dimensional environment so that the virtual object appears to be at or near the physical object in the physical world (e.g., the virtual object is displayed at a location in the three-dimensional environment that corresponds to the location in the physical environment where the virtual object would be displayed if the virtual object were a real object at that particular location).

[0196] In some embodiments, real-world objects present in the physical environment (e.g., and / or visible via display generation components) that are displayed in the three-dimensional environment can interact with virtual objects that exist only in the three-dimensional environment. For example, the three-dimensional environment can include a table and a vase placed on the table, where the table is a view (or representation) of the physical table in the physical environment and the vase is a virtual object.

[0197] In a three-dimensional environment (e.g., a real environment, a virtual environment, or an environment containing a mixture of real and virtual objects), objects may be referred to as having depth or simulated depth, or objects may be referred to as being visible, displayed, or located at different depths. In this context, depth refers to a dimension other than height or width. In some embodiments, depth is defined relative to a fixed set of coordinates (e.g., a room or object has a height, depth, and width defined relative to a fixed set of coordinates). In some embodiments, depth is defined relative to a user's location or viewpoint, where the depth dimension varies based on the user's location and / or the location and angle of the user's viewpoint. In some embodiments where depth is defined relative to the location of the user positioned relative to a surface of the environment (e.g., the floor or ground surface of the environment), objects that are farther away from the user along a line extending parallel to the surface are considered to have a greater depth within the environment, and / or the depth of an object is measured along an axis that extends outward from the user's location and is parallel to the surface of the environment (e.g., depth is defined in a cylindrical or substantially cylindrical coordinate system with the user's position at the center of the cylinder extending from the user's head toward the user's feet). Depth is defined relative to the user's viewpoint (e.g., a direction relative to a point in space that determines which parts of the environment are visible through a head-mounted device or other display). In some embodiments, objects that are further away from the user's viewpoint along a line that extends parallel to the direction of the user's viewpoint are considered to have greater depth in the environment, and / or the depth of an object is measured along an axis that extends from the user's viewpoint and extends outward from a line that is parallel to the direction of the user's viewpoint (e.g., depth is defined in a spherical or substantially spherical coordinate system with the origin of the viewpoint at the center of a sphere extending outward from the user's head).In some embodiments, depth is defined relative to a user interface container (e.g., a window or application in which application and / or system content is displayed), where the user interface container has a height and / or width, and depth is a dimension orthogonal to the height and / or width of the user interface container. In some embodiments, in situations where depth is defined relative to a user interface container, the height and / or width of the container are typically orthogonal or substantially orthogonal to a line extending from a user-based location (e.g., a user's viewpoint or location) to the user interface container (e.g., a center of the user interface container or another characteristic point of the user interface container) when the container is placed or initially displayed in a three-dimensional environment (e.g., such that the depth dimension of the container extends outward, away from the user or the user's viewpoint). In some embodiments, in situations where depth is defined relative to a user interface container, the depth of an object relative to the user interface container refers to the object's position along the depth dimension of the user interface container. In some embodiments, different containers can have different depth dimensions (e.g., different depth dimensions extending in different directions and / or away from different starting points from a user or a user's viewpoint). In some embodiments, when depth is defined for a user interface container, the direction of the depth dimension remains constant for the user interface container when the location of the user interface container, the user, and / or the user's viewpoint changes (e.g., or when multiple different viewers are viewing the same container in a three-dimensional environment, such as during a face-to-face collaboration session, and / or when multiple participants are in a real-time communication session with shared virtual content that includes the container). In some embodiments, in the case of curved containers (e.g., including containers with curved surfaces or curved content regions), the depth dimension optionally extends into the surface of the curved container.In some situations, z separation (e.g., the separation of two objects in the depth dimension), z height (e.g., the distance of one object from another object in the depth dimension), z position (e.g., the position of one object in the depth dimension), z depth (e.g., the position of one object in the depth dimension), or simulated z dimension (e.g., depth used as an object's dimension, an environment's dimension, a direction in space, and / or a direction in a simulated space) are used to refer to the concept of depth as described above.

[0198] In some embodiments, a user can optionally use one or more hands to interact with virtual objects in the three-dimensional environment as if the virtual objects were actual objects in the physical environment. For example, as described above, one or more sensors of the computer system optionally capture one or more of the user's hands and display a representation of the user's hands in the three-dimensional environment (e.g., in a manner similar to displaying real-world objects in the three-dimensional environment described above), or in some embodiments, due to the transparency / translucency of the user interface, or the projection of the user interface onto a transparent / translucent surface, or the portion of the display generating components displaying the projection of the user interface to the user's eyes or the field of view of the user's eyes, the user's hands are visible through the display generating components by the ability to see the physical environment through the user interface. Thus, in some embodiments, the user's hands are displayed at discrete locations in the three-dimensional environment and are treated as if they were objects in the three-dimensional environment that can interact with virtual objects in the three-dimensional environment as if they were actual physical objects in the physical environment. In some embodiments, the computer system can update the display of the representation of the user's hands in the three-dimensional environment in conjunction with the movement of the user's hands in the physical environment.

[0199] In some of the embodiments described below, for example, for purposes of determining whether a physical object is directly interacting with a virtual object (e.g., whether a hand is touching, grabbing, holding, etc., a virtual object, or whether it is within a threshold distance from the virtual object), the computer system can optionally determine an “effective” distance between the physical object in the physical world and the virtual object in the three-dimensional environment. For example, a hand directly interacting with a virtual object optionally includes one or more of the fingers of a hand pressing a virtual button, a user's hand grasping a virtual vase, two fingers of a user's hand pinching / holding an application's user interface together, and any other types of interactions described herein. For example, when determining whether and / or how a user is interacting with a virtual object, the computer system optionally determines the distance between the user's hand and the virtual object. In some embodiments, the computer system determines the distance between the user's hand and the virtual object by determining the distance between the location of the hand in the three-dimensional environment and the location of the target virtual object in the three-dimensional environment. For example, one or more hands of a user are positioned at particular positions in the physical world, which the computer system optionally captures and displays at particular corresponding positions in the three-dimensional environment (e.g., positions in the three-dimensional environment at which the hands are displayed, if the hands are virtual rather than physical hands). The positions of the hands in the three-dimensional environment are optionally compared to positions of target virtual objects in the three-dimensional environment to determine a distance between the user's one or more hands and the virtual objects. In some embodiments, the computer system optionally determines the distance between a physical object and a virtual object by comparing positions in the physical world (e.g., as opposed to comparing positions in the three-dimensional environment).For example, when determining the distance between one or more of a user's hands and a virtual object, the computer system optionally determines the corresponding location in the physical world of the virtual object (e.g., the position where the virtual object would be located in the physical world if the virtual object were a physical object rather than a virtual object), and then determines the distance between the corresponding physical position and the user's one or more hands. In some embodiments, the same technique is optionally used to determine the distance between any physical object and any virtual object. Thus, as described herein, when determining whether a physical object is in contact with a virtual object or whether a physical object is within a threshold distance of a virtual object, the computer system optionally performs any of the above-mentioned techniques to map the location of the physical object to the three-dimensional environment and / or to map the location of the virtual object to the physical environment.

[0200] In some embodiments, the same or similar techniques are used to determine where and what a user's gaze is directed at and / or where and what a physical stylus held by the user is directed at. For example, if a user's gaze is directed at a particular position in the physical environment, the computer system optionally determines a corresponding position in the three-dimensional environment (e.g., a virtual position of the gaze), and if a virtual object is located at that corresponding virtual position, the computer system optionally determines that the user's gaze is directed at that virtual object. Similarly, the computer system can optionally determine where the physical stylus is pointing in the physical environment based on the orientation of the physical stylus. In some embodiments, based on this determination, the computer system determines a corresponding virtual position in the three-dimensional environment that corresponds to the location in the physical environment where the stylus is pointing, and optionally determines that the stylus is pointing to the corresponding virtual position in the three-dimensional environment.

[0201] Similarly, embodiments described herein may refer to the location of a user (e.g., a user of a computer system) and / or the location of the computer system within a three-dimensional environment. In some embodiments, a user of a computer system is holding, wearing, or otherwise located at or near the computer system. Thus, in some embodiments, the location of the computer system is used as a proxy for the location of the user. In some embodiments, the location of the computer system and / or the user within the physical environment corresponds to a distinct location within the three-dimensional environment. For example, if a user stands at a location facing a distinct portion of the physical environment that is visible through the display generating components, the location of the computer system is the location within the physical environment (and its corresponding location within the three-dimensional environment) at which the user would see objects within the physical environment in the same position, orientation, and / or size (e.g., absolutely and / or relative to each other) as the objects are visible through the display generating components of the computer system within the three-dimensional environment. Similarly, if the virtual objects displayed in the three-dimensional environment were physical objects in the physical environment (e.g., the physical objects were located in the same physical environment location and had the same physical environment size and orientation as in the three-dimensional environment), the location of the computer system and / or user is the position at which the user would see the virtual objects in the physical environment in the same position, orientation, and / or size (e.g., absolutely and / or relative to each other and to real-world objects) as they were displayed by the display generation components of the computer system in the three-dimensional environment.

[0202] In this disclosure, various input methods are described with respect to interaction with a computer system. Where one example is provided using one input device or input method and another example is provided using a different input device or input method, it should be understood that each example may be compatible with, and optionally utilize, the input device or input method described with respect to the other example. Similarly, various output methods are described with respect to interaction with a computer system. Where one example is provided using one output device or output method and another example is provided using a different output device or output method, it should be understood that each example may be compatible with, and optionally utilize, the output device or output method described with respect to the other example. Similarly, various methods are described with respect to interaction with a virtual environment or a mixed reality environment via a computer system. Where one example is provided using interaction with a virtual environment and another example is provided using a mixed reality environment, it should be understood that each example may be compatible with, and optionally utilize, the method described with respect to the other example. Thus, this disclosure discloses embodiments that are combinations of features of multiple examples, without exhaustively listing all features of the embodiments in the description of each exemplary embodiment. User Interface and Related Processing

[0203] We now turn our attention to embodiments of user interfaces ("UI") and associated processing that may be performed in a computer system, such as a portable multifunction device or a head-mounted device, equipped with display generating components, one or more input devices, and (optionally) one or more cameras.

[0204] 7A-7F illustrate an example computer system that selectively determines and applies time settings to individual virtual environments based on system settings, according to some embodiments.

[0205] 7A illustrates computer system 101 displaying, via a display generating component (e.g., display generating component 120 of FIG. 1), a three-dimensional environment 704 from the perspective of user 706 shown in overhead view 718 (e.g., facing a far wall 714 of the physical environment in which computer system 101 is located). Overhead view 718 also illustrates zone boundaries 729a-729c within three-dimensional environment 704, as described below.

[0206] As described above with reference to FIGS. 1-6 , computer system 101 optionally includes display generating components (e.g., a touchscreen or non-touchscreen display) and multiple image sensors (e.g., image sensor 314 of FIG. 3 ). The image sensors optionally include one or more of a visible light camera, an infrared camera, a depth sensor, or any other sensor that computer system 101 could use to capture one or more images of a user or a portion of a user (e.g., one or more of the user's hands) while the user interacts with computer system 101. In some embodiments, the user interface shown and described below can also be realized on a head-mounted display that includes display generating components that display a user interface or a three-dimensional environment to the user, and sensors (e.g., external sensors facing outward from the user) for detecting movements of the physical environment and / or the user's hands, such as movements that are interpreted by the computer system as gestures, such as air gestures, and / or the user's line of sight (e.g., internal sensors facing inward toward the user's face).

[0207] As shown in FIG. 7A , computer system 101 captures one or more images of the physical environment surrounding computer system 101 (e.g., operating environment 100), including one or more objects within the physical environment surrounding computer system 101. In some embodiments, computer system 101 displays a representation of the physical environment within a three-dimensional environment 704, or portions of the physical environment are viewable via display generation component 120 of computer system 101. For example, three-dimensional environment 704 includes portions of the walls, ceiling, and floor within user 706's physical environment. Three-dimensional environment 704 also includes corner table 708, coffee table 710, and side table 712, which are real-world physical objects located within user 706's real-world environment 702, as shown at their respective locations within overhead view 718. For example, corner table 708 is located between first zone boundary 729 a and far wall 714. Side table 712 is located between first zone boundary 729 a and third zone boundary 729 c. Coffee table 710 is located between second zone boundary 729b and third zone boundary 729c.

[0208] 7A , the three-dimensional environment 704 also includes an application user interface, such as a video application user interface 726 used to display video content 727. In some embodiments, the video application user interface 726 is a different type of application, such as a messaging user interface or a content browsing user interface. In some embodiments, the three-dimensional environment 704 includes displayed three-dimensional objects, such as a virtual television, a virtual clock, a virtual alarm, a virtual speaker system, virtual artwork, and / or a virtual environment (e.g., as described below), or any other virtual object displayed by the computer system 101 that is not included in the physical environment of the computer system 101. As shown in the overhead view 718, the video application user interface 726 is located along the second zone boundary 729 b.

[0209] 7A , the three-dimensional environment 704 also includes a control center user interface 724 (e.g., a first user interface of the system user interface and / or the control center user interface). As shown in the overhead view 718, the control center user interface 724 is located along the second zone boundary 729b. In some embodiments, the control center user interface 724 includes a virtual environment selection user interface element 728a (designated as element “1”), a focus mode control user interface element 728b (designated as element “2”), an auto-dimming user interface element 728c (designated as element “3”), a volume control user interface element 728d (designated as element “4”), an immersion slider user interface element 728e (designated as element “5”), and a brightness slider user interface element 728f (designated as element “6”). As further shown in the three-dimensional environment 704, an immersion level indicator 716 is displayed in the lower left portion of the three-dimensional environment 704. As shown, the immersion level is currently at 0% immersion. Immersion level is described in more detail with reference to method 800.

[0210] FIG. 7A1 illustrates concepts similar and / or identical to those illustrated in FIG. 7A (having many of the same reference numbers). Unless otherwise indicated below, elements illustrated in FIG. 7A1 that have the same reference numbers as elements illustrated in FIGS. 7A-7F should be understood to have one or more or all of the same characteristics. FIG. 7A1 includes a computer system 101 that includes (or is the same as) a display generation component 120. In some embodiments, the computer system 101 and the display generation component 120 have one or more of the characteristics of the computer system 101 illustrated in FIGS. 7A-7F and the display generation component 120 illustrated in FIGS. 1 and 3, respectively, and in some embodiments, the computer system 101 and the display generation component 120 illustrated in FIGS. 7A-7F have one or more of the characteristics of the computer system 101 and the display generation component 120 illustrated in FIG. 7A1.

[0211] In FIG. 7A1 , display generating component 120 includes one or more internal image sensors 314 a (e.g., eye-tracking cameras 540 described with reference to FIG. 5 ) oriented toward the user's face. In some embodiments, internal image sensor 314 a is used for eye tracking (e.g., detecting the user's gaze). Internal image sensor 314 a is optionally positioned on left and right portions of display generating component 120 to enable eye tracking of the user's left and right eyes. Display generating component 120 also includes external image sensors 314 b and 314 c facing outward from the user to detect and / or capture the physical environment and / or the user's hand movements. In some embodiments, image sensors 314 a, 314 b, and 314 c have one or more of the characteristics of image sensor 314 described with reference to FIGS. 7A-7F .

[0212] 7A1, display generation component 120 is shown as displaying content that optionally corresponds to the content described as being displayed and / or visible via display generation component 120 with reference to FIGS. 7A-7F. In some embodiments, the content is displayed by a single display (e.g., display 510 of FIG. 5) included in display generation component 120. In some embodiments, display generation component 120 includes two or more displays (e.g., left and right display panels for the user's left and right eyes, respectively, as described with reference to FIG. 5) having displayed outputs that are merged (e.g., by the user's brain) to create the view of the content shown in FIG. 7A1.

[0213] 7A1 (e.g., the field of view shown by dashed lines in the overhead view, as captured by external image sensors 314b and 314c and / or visible to the user via display generating component 120). Because display generating component 120 is optionally a head-mounted device, the field of view of display generating component 120 is optionally the same as or similar to the field of view of the user.

[0214] 7A1, a user is shown performing an air pinch gesture (e.g., with hand 720 while the user's attention is directed at option 728a, as indicated by gaze point 798) to provide input to computer system 101 and provide user input directed to content displayed by computer system 101. Such depictions are intended to be illustrative rather than limiting, and the user optionally provides user input using different air gestures and / or using other forms of input, as described with reference to FIGS.

[0215] In some embodiments, computer system 101 responds to user input as described with reference to Figures 7A-7F.

[0216] 7A1, the user's hands are visible in the three-dimensional environment because they are within the field of view of display generation component 120. That is, the user can optionally see, within the three-dimensional environment, any part of their body that is within the field of view of display generation component 120. It will be understood that one or more or all of the aspects of the present disclosure shown in or described with reference to FIGS. 7A-7F and / or described with reference to the corresponding method(s) are, optionally, implemented on computer system 101 and display generation unit 120 in a manner the same as or similar to that shown in FIG.

[0217] As shown in the overhead view 718, a user 706 is shown sitting on a couch 722 while interacting with the computer system 101. While interacting with the computer system 101, in FIG. 7A, the computer system 101 detects a selection input from the user's hand 720 directed toward a virtual environment selection user interface element 728a displayed in a control center user interface 724. For example, the first computer system 101 is configured to detect the selection input via a tap or hand air gesture, such as pointing or pinching, directed toward the interface element 728a. In response to selecting the virtual environment selection user interface element 728a, the computer system 101 displays an environment selection user interface 730 within the three-dimensional environment 704, as shown in FIG. 7B. For example, the computer system 101 updates the three-dimensional environment 704, replacing the control center user interface 724 with the environment selection user interface 730.

[0218] 7B , the environment selection user interface 730 includes a first time setting interface 732 and / or a second time setting interface 734. The computer system 101 displays the first time setting interface 732 or the second time setting interface 734 depending on the individual setting of the computer system. For example, if the individual setting of the computer system is set to a first value, the first time setting interface 732 is optionally displayed. If the individual setting of the computer system is set to a second value, the second time setting interface 734 is optionally displayed. In some embodiments, the first value and the second value each correspond to different lighting characteristics of the individual virtual environment, such as a light mode or a dark mode. In some embodiments, if the individual setting is not set to a particular value, both the first time setting interface 732 and the second time setting interface 734 are displayed.

[0219] In some embodiments, the first time setting interface 732 corresponds to a light mode (e.g., a partly cloudy and sunny morning time or a clear and sunny afternoon time). The first time setting interface 730 of FIG. 7B includes selectable options for selecting individual virtual environments for display with the first time setting applied. For example, the first time setting interface 730 includes selectable options B1, B2, and B3. In one example, B1 corresponds to a virtual environment of a beach scene, optionally including virtual elements such as a beach, palm trees, and / or umbrellas. In another example, B2 corresponds to a virtual environment of a mountain scene, optionally including virtual elements such as mountains, trees, animals, and / or skiers. In another example, B3 corresponds to a virtual environment of a park, optionally including an amusement park, a basketball court, and / or a barbecue pit. Thus, in the first time setting interface 732, selecting one of the selectable options (e.g., B1, B2, or B3) corresponding to an individual virtual environment optionally results in a light mode being applied to the selected individual virtual environment.

[0220] In some embodiments, the second time setting interface 734 corresponds to a dark mode (e.g., evening when it is night and the sun is setting). The second time setting interface 734 of FIG. 7B includes selectable options for selecting individual virtual environments for display with the second time setting applied. For example, the second time setting interface 734 includes selectable options B1, B2, and B3. As described above, B1 optionally corresponds to a beach scene virtual environment, B2 optionally corresponds to a mountain scene, and B3 optionally corresponds to a park environment. In the second time setting interface 734, selecting one of the selectable options corresponding to individual virtual environments (e.g., B1, B2, or B3) optionally results in the dark mode being applied to the selected individual virtual environment.

[0221] In some embodiments, the environment selection user interface 730 includes an atmosphere effect interface 736. The display of the atmosphere effect interface 736 is, optionally, independent of whether the individual settings of the computer system 101 have a first value or a second value. As shown in FIG. 7B , the atmosphere effect interface 736 includes selectable options E1, E2, and E3. In some embodiments, a request to display an atmosphere effect (e.g., selecting E1, E2, or E3) causes the computer system 101 to modify one or more visual characteristics of the physical environment visible within the three-dimensional environment 702 so that the physical environment appears as if it has been enhanced through color and / or exposure adjustment, as described in more detail with reference to method 800. In some embodiments, applying the atmosphere effect to the physical environment modifies one or more visual characteristics of the physical environment so that the physical environment appears as if it were located in a different time, location, and / or conditions (e.g., morning lighting instead of afternoon lighting, or sunny instead of cloudy). In some embodiments, applying the atmosphere effect to the physical environment modifies the physical environment to appear dimly lit and / or damp.

[0222] As further shown in Figure 7B, computer system 101 is configured to detect a selection input from a user's hand 720 directed at selectable option B1 from first time setting interface 732, which initiates a display of a beach scene virtual environment with a first time setting applied to the environment. In response to detecting a selection of selectable option B1 from first time setting interface 732, the beach scene virtual environment is displayed in three-dimensional environment 704, as shown in Figure 7C. In particular, computer system 101 updates three-dimensional environment 704 to include a beach scene virtual environment 745 having a visual appearance corresponding to the first time setting corresponding to the light mode.

[0223] As shown in FIG. 7C , the first time setting interface 730 remains displayed within the three-dimensional environment 704, with selectable option B1 shaded to indicate that a virtual environment 745 corresponding to B1 is currently displayed. As shown, the virtual environment 745 includes a virtual sun 740, a virtual table and umbrella 742, and a virtual tree 744. Because the first time setting is applied to the virtual environment 745, the virtual environment 745 corresponds to a simulated time of day in a bright mode, which includes a visual appearance corresponding to a sunny and bright environment within the simulated physical space of the beach scene. As further shown in the three-dimensional environment 704 of FIG. 7C , the virtual environment 745 is displayed with partial immersion (e.g., as described in more detail with reference to method 800). For example, increasing the immersion level optionally causes more of the virtual environment 745 to be displayed, replacing and / or obscuring more of the physical environment, and decreasing the immersion level optionally causes less of the virtual environment to be displayed, revealing portions of the physical environment that were not previously displayed and / or obscured. As shown in immersion level indicator 716, the shading within immersion level indicator 716 indicates that the immersion level of virtual environment 745 is approximately 60% immersive.

[0224] As shown in overhead view 718, at the immersion level of virtual environment 745 displayed in FIG. 7C , virtual environment 745 optionally extends from second zone boundary 729b to far wall 714 within three-dimensional environment 704. As illustrated in FIG. 7C , a representation of a virtual sun 740 is located between first zone boundary 729a and far wall 714, a representation of a virtual table and umbrella 742 is located between first zone boundary 729a and far wall 714, and a representation of a virtual tree 744 is located between first zone boundary 729a and second zone boundary 729b. As further shown in FIG. 7C , video application user interface 726 and environment selection user interface 730 are located along second zone boundary 729b. As shown in FIG. 7C , real-world physical objects remain in their previous locations within three-dimensional environment 704. For example, as described above, corner table 708 is located between first zone boundary 729a and far wall 714, side table 712 is located between first zone boundary 729a and third zone boundary 729c, coffee table 710 is located between second zone boundary 729b and third zone boundary 729c, and couch 722 is located between third zone boundary 729c and the back wall.

[0225] 7D illustrates computer system 101 displaying three-dimensional environment 704 including virtual environment 745 having a second time setting applied to virtual environment 745. As shown in FIG. 7D, in response to detecting an input selecting option B1 from second time setting interface 734 of FIG. 7B, computer system 101 displays a beach scene virtual environment with a visual appearance corresponding to the second time setting corresponding to dark mode. As shown in FIG. 7D, virtual environment 745 includes a virtual moon 746, a virtual star 748, a virtual table and umbrella 742, and a virtual tree 744. Because the second time setting is applied to virtual environment 745, virtual environment 745 has a visual appearance corresponding to a simulated time of day of night mode within the simulated physical space of the beach scene (e.g., a dark beach environment having a visual appearance corresponding to a time of day that is darker than the time of day of the beach environment corresponding to light mode).

[0226] As further shown in the three-dimensional environment 704 of FIG. 7D , the second time setting of the virtual environment 745 also causes the computer system 101 to change the visual appearance of one or more portions of the real-world environment 702 that are visible within the three-dimensional environment 704 (e.g., reducing their visual salience and making them appear darker). For example, as shown in the three-dimensional environment 704 of FIG. 7D , portions of the three-dimensional environment 702 that are not obscured by the virtual environment 745, such as a portion of the floor and the coffee table 710, appear darker, more blurred, and / or less colored when the virtual environment 745 with the second time setting is displayed (compared to when the virtual environment 745 with the first time setting is displayed, as shown in FIG. 7C ). In some embodiments, the second time setting does not cause the computer system 101 to change the visual appearance of virtual content that is not part of the virtual environment. For example, the computer system does not change the appearance of an application, such as the video application user interface 726. As further shown in three-dimensional environment 704 of Figure 7D, virtual environment 745 is displayed at the same immersion level as compared to virtual environment 745 displayed at the first time setting shown in Figure 7C. In particular, as shown in immersion level indicator 716, the shading within immersion level indicator 716 indicates that the immersion level of virtual environment 745 is still approximately 60% immersive.

[0227] As shown in the overhead view 718 of FIG. 7D , representations of a virtual moon 746 and a virtual star 748 are located between the first zone boundary 729a and the far wall 714. The remaining elements remain in the same locations they had in FIG. 7C . As further shown in the three-dimensional environment 704, a control center user interface 724 is optionally displayed to allow the user to select one or more of the selectable elements from the control center user interface 724. For example, the computer system 101 detects a selection input from the user's hand 720 directed toward an immersion slider user-interface element 728e (shown as element "5") to increase the immersion level shown in FIG. 7E . In some embodiments, the selection input is a pinch and / or drag of the immersion slider user-interface element 728e to increase the immersion level.

[0228] FIG. 7E illustrates the virtual environment 745 of FIG. 7D with an increased immersion level in response to input detected from the hand 720 in FIG. 7D. Specifically, as shown in the immersion level indicator 716, the shading within the immersion level indicator 716 indicates that the immersion level of the virtual environment 745 has increased to approximately 90% immersion. The increased immersion causes the computer system 101 to display more of the virtual environment 745, replacing and / or obscuring more of the physical environment. For example, as shown in FIG. 7E, the increased immersion obscures additional portions of the floor. As shown in the overhead view 718, at 90% immersion, the virtual environment 745 extends from the zone boundary 731b to the far wall 714.

[0229] Figure 7F illustrates three-dimensional environment 704 in response to computer system 101 detecting input to select an atmosphere effect option from environment selection user interface 730 shown in Figure 7B. Referring to Figure 7B, computer system 101 detects a selection input from a user's hand 720 directed toward selectable option E2, which applies a corresponding atmosphere effect to three-dimensional environment 704. In response to the selection, as shown in Figure 7F, visual characteristics of the physical environment are enhanced and / or altered; for example, simulated lighting is displayed entering through virtual window 750, which optionally causes more ambient light (compared to the amount of ambient light in the physical environment) to be present in three-dimensional environment 704 and thus increases the corresponding lighting effect. For example, the simulated lighting entering through virtual window 750 in Figure 7F causes various shadows to be virtually cast onto various real-world objects in the physical environment where such shadows were not previously present. As shown, simulated lighting entering through virtual window 750 causes a virtually cast simulated shadow 752 onto corner table 708, a virtually cast simulated shadow 754 onto side table 712, and a virtually cast simulated shadow 756 onto coffee table 710. Additional details regarding applying atmospheric effects to three-dimensional environment 704 are described with reference to method 800.

[0230] 8A-8K are flowcharts illustrating an exemplary method for selectively determining and applying time settings to an individual virtual environment based on system settings, according to some embodiments. In some embodiments, method 800 is performed on a computer system (e.g., computer system 101 of FIG. 1 , such as a tablet, smartphone, wearable computer, or head-mounted device) that includes a display generating component (e.g., display generating component 120 of FIGS. 1, 3, and 4 ) (e.g., a head-up display, a display, a touchscreen, a projector, etc.) and one or more cameras (e.g., a camera pointing downward in a user's hand (e.g., color sensors, infrared sensors, and other depth-sensing cameras) or a camera pointing forward from the user's head). In some embodiments, method 800 is performed by instructions stored on a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium and executed by one or more processors of the computer system, such as one or more processors 202 of computer system 101 (e.g., control unit 110 of FIG. 1A ). Some operations of method 800 are optionally combined and / or the order of some operations is optionally changed.

[0231] In some embodiments, method 800 is performed on a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, such as a mobile device (e.g., a tablet, smartphone, media player, or wearable device), or a computer or other electronic device. In some embodiments, the display generation component is a display integrated with the electronic device (optionally a touchscreen display), an external display such as a monitor, projector, television, and / or a hardware component (optionally integrated or external) for projecting a user interface or making the user interface visible to one or more users. In some embodiments, the one or more input devices include electronic devices or components capable of receiving user input (e.g., capturing user input, detecting user input) and transmitting information associated with the user input to the computer system. Examples of input devices include a touchscreen, a mouse (e.g., external), a trackpad (optionally integrated or external), a touchpad (optionally integrated or external), a remote control device (e.g., external), another mobile device (e.g., separate from the computer system), a handheld device (e.g., external), a controller (e.g., external), a camera, a depth sensor, an eye tracking device, and / or a motion sensor (e.g., hand tracking device, hand motion sensor). In some embodiments, the computer system communicates with a hand tracking device (e.g., one or more cameras, depth sensors, proximity sensors, and / or touch sensors (e.g., touchscreen or trackpad)). In some embodiments, the hand tracking device is a wearable device such as a smart glove. In some embodiments, the hand tracking device is a handheld input device such as a remote control or a stylus.

[0232] In some embodiments, the three-dimensional environment (e.g., an environment corresponding to the physical environment surrounding the display generating components) has one or more of the characteristics of the three-dimensional environments of methods 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, and / or 1800. In some embodiments, the three-dimensional environment is generated, displayed, or otherwise made viewable by a computer system (e.g., an extended reality (XR) environment, such as a virtual reality (VR) environment, a mixed reality (MR) environment, and / or an augmented reality (AR) environment). In some embodiments, the physical environment is visible through a transparent portion of the display generating components (e.g., a true or actual pass-through). In some embodiments, a representation of the physical environment is displayed within the three-dimensional environment via a display generating component (e.g., virtual or video pass-through) and is visible via the display generating component, such as environment 704 of FIG. 7B , and the computer system receives (802a) a first input from, such as hand 720 of FIG. 7B via one or more input devices (e.g., a tap in space or hand air gesture such as air pointing or air pinching at an icon or other selectable option within an augmented reality (AR) or virtual reality (VR) environment to launch and / or display a virtual environment, or input using an interface controller within the AR or VR environment to provide input to select an icon or other selectable option to launch and / or display a virtual environment, such as a separate virtual environment described below). In some embodiments, the first input includes the hand of a user of the computer system performing a pinch air gesture, in which the index finger and thumb of the user's hand are brought together and touch while the user's attention is directed toward an icon or selectable option. In some embodiments, the first user input is an attention-only and / or gaze-only input (e.g., does not include input from one or more parts of the user other than the part providing the attention input).

[0233] In some embodiments, the first input corresponds to a request to display a personalized virtual environment representing a simulated physical space, such as a request to display background 1 of FIG. 7B (e.g., the personalized virtual environment optionally has one or more of the characteristics of the virtual environments of methods 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, and / or 1800). In some embodiments, the personalized virtual environment is a simulated three-dimensional environment displayed within the three-dimensional environment, optionally instead of (e.g., full immersion) or optionally simultaneously with (e.g., partial immersion) a representation of the physical environment. Some examples of virtual environments include a lake environment, a mountain environment, a sunset scene, a sunrise scene, a night environment, a grassy environment, and / or a concert scene, etc. In some embodiments, the virtual environment is based on an actual physical location, such as a museum and / or an aquarium. In some embodiments, the virtual environment is an artist-designed location. Thus, displaying the virtual environment within the three-dimensional environment optionally provides the user with a virtual experience as if the user were physically located within the virtual environment.

[0234] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first input (802b), following a determination that the individual settings of the computer system have a first value and the individual virtual environment is a first virtual environment (e.g., the individual settings include settings that correspond to and / or define a time of day for the first virtual environment, the first value optionally corresponding to a clear, bright daytime or morning time), the computer system displays (802c) the first virtual environment within the three-dimensional environment having a first visual appearance (e.g., a first size within the three-dimensional environment, a first brightness, a first opacity, a first level of clarity (or blur), and / or a first level of immersion) that corresponds to a first time of day in the physical space simulated by the first virtual environment, such as the time of day of virtual environment 745 of FIG. 7C (e.g., the first time of day, optionally, corresponds to a simulated time of day such as a bright mode (e.g., 10:00 AM partly cloudy and sunny, or 3:00 PM clear and sunny)). For example, a first virtual environment at a first time optionally includes a first brightness, a first opacity, a first level of clarity (or blur), and / or a first amount of virtual objects (e.g., a rainbow, sunbeams, and / or flying birds).

[0235] In some embodiments, following a determination that the individual setting of the computer system has a second value (e.g., the first value and the second value are, optionally, associated with different time-of-day characteristics (e.g., light mode or dark mode), and the individual virtual environment is the first virtual environment) that is different from the first value, the computer system displays the first virtual environment within the three-dimensional environment with a second visual appearance that corresponds to a second time of day in the physical space simulated by the first virtual environment (e.g., the second time of day, optionally, corresponds to a simulated time of day such as dark mode (e.g., 11:00 PM in the evening when the sun has set and the moon and stars are illuminating the sky)), wherein the second visual appearance is different from the first visual appearance, and wherein the second time of day is different from the first time of day, such as the time of environment 745 of FIG. 7D (802d). For example, the second visual appearance optionally corresponds to a second size, a second brightness (or second darkness), a second opacity, a second level of clarity (or blur), and / or a second level of immersion within the three-dimensional environment. In some embodiments, the second visual appearance corresponding to the second time is associated with a darker visual appearance than the first visual appearance corresponding to the first time. In some embodiments, the second visual appearance corresponding to the second time is associated with a second amount of virtual objects in the first virtual environment corresponding to a darker visual appearance (e.g., the moon and stars illuminating the sky). Thus, the first value and the second value are optionally associated with different lighting characteristics of the first virtual environment. For example, the first value is optionally associated with a brighter (e.g., greater intensity) and / or a lighter display value than the second value. Furthermore, the first virtual environment corresponding to the second value optionally includes more or fewer virtual objects than the first virtual environment corresponding to the first value. Thus, the individual settings at the first value (or second value) optionally include lighting characteristics applied to virtual objects in the first virtual environment, in addition to optionally controlling other features of the first virtual environment, such as the amount of virtual objects displayed in the first virtual environment.Automatically selecting a time of day (e.g., a first time of day or a second time of day) for a virtual environment based on a setting on a computer system provides a more realistic and immersive user experience, reduces the number of inputs required to select a time of day to apply to the virtual environment, and simplifies user interaction with the computer system.

[0236] In some embodiments, displaying the first virtual environment with a first visual appearance corresponding to a first time of day (e.g., the first time of day optionally corresponds to a simulated time of day, such as a bright mode) includes displaying the first virtual environment with simulated lighting corresponding to the first time of day (804a), such as the daytime simulated lighting of environment 745 of FIG. 7C . In some embodiments, the simulated lighting corresponding to the first time of day affects a brightness level of the first virtual environment, including virtual elements within the virtual environment. In some embodiments, the simulated lighting is from a light source, such as a light bulb, a torch, a lighter, a lamp, a candle, a match, the sun, and / or a laser. The simulated lighting from the above light sources optionally includes a distinct intensity adjusted to correspond to the first time of day.

[0237] In some embodiments, displaying the first virtual environment with a second visual appearance corresponding to the second time of day includes displaying the first virtual environment with simulated lighting corresponding to the second time of day (804b), such as the daytime simulated lighting of environment 745 of FIG. 7D . In some embodiments, the simulated lighting corresponding to the second time of day affects brightness levels and is optionally from light sources such as light bulbs, torches, lighters, lamps, candles, matches, the moon, and / or lasers. The simulated lighting from the above light sources optionally includes individual intensities adjusted to correspond to the second time of day. Displaying the first virtual environment with simulated lighting reduces the number of inputs required to adjust lighting in the virtual environment and simplifies user interaction with the computer system.

[0238] In some embodiments, the simulated lighting includes simulated natural lighting from a simulated natural light source, such as the simulated sun of Figure 7C (806). In some embodiments, the simulated natural lighting is optionally from natural light sources such as the sun, moon, stars, volcanoes, fire, jellyfish, fireflies, glowworms, or other simulated natural light sources corresponding to a distinct time of day. Displaying the first virtual environment with simulated lighting, including simulated natural lighting, reduces the number of inputs required to adjust the lighting in the virtual environment to include natural light sources and simplifies user interaction with the computer system.

[0239] In some embodiments, displaying the first virtual environment in a first visual appearance includes displaying a first virtual element (e.g., a virtual palm tree, a virtual picnic table, or a virtual umbrella) in the first virtual environment virtually lit by simulated lighting (e.g., a sun) corresponding to a first time of day, such as the simulated sun shining on the umbrella in FIG. 7C (808a), and displaying the second virtual environment in a second visual appearance includes displaying the first virtual element in the first virtual environment virtually lit by simulated lighting (e.g., a moon and / or stars) corresponding to a second time of day, such as the simulated moon shining on the umbrella in FIG. 7D (808b). For example, the first virtual environment optionally includes a beach scene, optionally including virtual elements such as a beach, palm trees, and / or an umbrella. The first virtual element is optionally a virtual palm tree, optionally virtually lit by a simulated sun for the first time of day. At a second time, the same virtual palm trees are optionally illuminated by a simulated moon and stars. Displaying the same elements in the virtual environment with simulated lighting corresponding to different times of day provides a more consistent presentation of the virtual environment because the same elements are illuminated by the simulated lighting, thereby reducing errors in interaction and simplifying user interaction with the computer system.

[0240] In some embodiments, individual settings are selected (810) based on user input, such as when user 706 of FIG. 7C sets the time settings for environment 745 (e.g., the input optionally includes the user's hand performing a pinch air gesture, a tap on a touchpad, a click on a touchpad, and / or the selection of one or more buttons on a handheld controller). In some embodiments, the three-dimensional environment optionally includes a control center user interface including a first selectable element corresponding to a time characteristic of a light mode and a second selectable element corresponding to a time characteristic of a dark mode. For example, a user of the computer system can optionally switch from light mode to dark mode or from dark mode to light mode according to the user's personal preferences via the control center user interface. In another example, a user of the computer system can optionally change text size, change volume output settings, and / or change Wi-Fi settings via the control center user interface. Enabling a user of a first computer system to manually select time characteristics corresponding to light mode and dark mode allows efficient access to change the time characteristics of the virtual environment, thereby improving user-device interaction.

[0241] In some embodiments, the individual setting having a first value (e.g., light mode) or a second value (e.g., dark mode) is subject to automatic determination by the computer system (812) without detecting an input corresponding to selecting the first value or the second value, such as when the computer system 101 automatically sets the time setting for the environment 745 in FIG. 7C . In some embodiments, the automatic determination of the first value or the second value to apply to the individual setting is automatically determined based on meeting criteria such as the current weather conditions at the computer system or the current time at the electronic device. In some embodiments, because the current weather conditions optionally vary depending on the location of the computer device (e.g., sunny weather in Los Angeles and cloudy and rainy in Seattle) and / or the current time depends on the location of the electronic device and / or different time zones (e.g., the current time is 3:00 PM in Los Angeles and 12:00 PM in Hawaii), the automatic value of the individual setting varies depending on the location of the electronic device. For example, if it is 9:00 AM at the computer system, the first value is optionally applied. If the current weather is dark and rainy, the second value is optionally applied. If it is 8:00 PM at the computer system and the computer system is located in Alaska during the summer when the current weather is bright and sunny, the first value is optionally applied. In some embodiments, if it is 11:00 PM at the computer system (regardless of the weather), the second value is optionally applied. In some embodiments, if the weather is bright and sunny at the computer system (regardless of the time), the first value is optionally applied. Automatically determining the first or second value to apply to individual settings reduces the number of inputs required to select individual values ​​(e.g., time of day) to apply, thereby reducing errors in interacting with the computer system.

[0242] In some embodiments, the automatic determination by the computer system includes automatically setting a first value (e.g., light mode) for the individual setting in accordance with a determination that the current time at the computer system is a first time (814b), and automatically setting a second value (e.g., dark mode) for the individual setting in accordance with a determination that the current time at the computer system is a second time different from the first time (814c). In some embodiments, the automatic determination of the first or second value to apply to the individual setting is automatically determined based on the current time when a request to display the individual virtual environment is initiated and / or while the individual virtual environment is already displayed (e.g., the individual virtual environment automatically switches between different times when already displayed). For example, if the current time is between 6:00 AM and 5:00 PM, the first value is optionally automatically applied. In another example, if the current time is between 5:00 PM and 6:00 AM, the second value is optionally automatically applied. Automatically determining the first or second value to apply to an individual setting based on the current time reduces the number of inputs required to select the individual value (e.g., time) to apply, thereby reducing errors in interacting with the computer system.

[0243] In some embodiments, the automatic determination by the computer system includes automatically setting a first value (e.g., a bright mode) for the individual setting (816b), such as when the lighting in the space of computer system 101 in FIG. 7C is at a first level, in accordance with a determination that the lighting level in the physical space of the computer system (e.g., the computer system and / or the physical environment surrounding the user, such as a living room in which the computer system resides) is at a first lighting level; and automatically setting a second value (e.g., a dark mode) for the individual setting (816c), such as when the lighting in the space of computer system 101 in FIG. 7C is at a second level, in accordance with a determination that the lighting level in the physical space of the computer system is at a second lighting level different from the first lighting level (816a). In some embodiments, the automatic determination of the first or second value to apply to the individual setting is automatically determined based on the lighting level in an environment in which the computer system and / or the user resides, such as a living room, bedroom, garage, office, and / or park location. In some embodiments, the lighting level can be measured in lux, which is a measurement of light intensity. For example, in a daytime outdoor location, the light level may range between approximately 10,000 lux and 25,000 lux. In a nighttime outdoor location, the light level may be between approximately 20 lux and 50 lux. For example, if the computer system is located in a location where the light level is between 51 lux and 100,000 lux (and / or if the light level is greater than a threshold of 5, 10, 25, 50, 100, 200, 500, or 1000 lux), the first value is automatically applied. In another example, if the computer system is located in a location where the light level is between 0 lux and 50 lux (and / or if the light level is less than a threshold of 5, 10, 25, 50, 100, 200, 500, or 1000 lux), the second value is automatically applied. In another example, if the computer system is located in a sunny, bright park, the first value is automatically applied. In another example, if the computer system is located in a dark garage, the second value is automatically applied.Automatically determining the first or second value to apply to an individual setting based on the level of lighting in the room reduces the number of inputs required to select an individual value (e.g., time of day) to apply to match the lighting in the individual environment in which the computer system is located, thereby reducing errors in interacting with the computer system.

[0244] In some embodiments, before displaying the first virtual environment in the first visual appearance or the second visual appearance, the computer system, via a display generation component, displays (818) a control center user interface (e.g., as described with reference to step(s) 810), such as control center 730 of FIG. 7C , for controlling one or more functions of the computer system and including one or more selectable options selectable for setting individual settings to a first value (e.g., light mode) or a second value (e.g., dark mode). For example, if a first selectable option is selected in the control center, the virtual environment optionally includes a beach scene with light mode time-of-day lighting characteristics. In another example, if a second selectable option in the control center is selected, the virtual environment optionally includes a beach scene with dark mode time-of-day lighting characteristics. Enabling a user of the first computer system to manually select time-of-day characteristics in the control center user interface enables seamless and efficient accessibility for changing time-of-day characteristics of individual virtual environments, thereby improving user-device interaction.

[0245] In some embodiments, while displaying the control center user interface via the display generation component, the computer system receives (820) via one or more input devices a second input directed to one or more selectable options (e.g., the one or more selectable options are icons and / or thumbnails that can optionally correspond to a first or second value, a virtual environment, an immersion level, an atmospheric effect, and / or a volume intensity level), such as an input directed to the control center 730 of FIG. 7B . In some embodiments, the selection input includes an air pinch gesture, a click on the touch-sensitive surface, and / or a mouse click detected while the user's attention is directed to the associated selectable option), sets the individual setting to the first or second value in accordance with the second input, and ceases displaying the control center user interface (e.g., while continuing to display the individual virtual environment), as shown in FIGS. 7C and 7D . In some embodiments, the control center user interface optionally includes one or more selectable options directed to different time-of-day characteristics and / or atmospheric effects. For example, if a first value corresponding to the bright mode time characteristic is selected, the bright mode time characteristic is optionally applied to the individual virtual environment, and the control center user interface ceases to be displayed within the three-dimensional environment. In some embodiments, the control center user interface ceases to be displayed a specified threshold (e.g., 0, 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 20, or 40 seconds) after the second input is received. In some embodiments, the control center user interface gradually fades out (e.g., from low transparency to maximum transparency) until the control center user interface is no longer visible within the three-dimensional environment. Ceasing to display the control center user interface after selection of the first or second value enhances the user's virtual experience by removing elements in the three-dimensional environment that may block the selected portion of the individual virtual environment, thereby improving user-device interaction.

[0246] In some embodiments, the computer system, via the display generation component, displays a virtual environment selection user interface, the virtual environment selection user interface including a first selectable option selectable to display a first virtual environment (e.g., a beach environment, a mountain environment, a park environment, a city environment, and / or an amusement park environment), such as user interface 730 of Figure 7B (822a). In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the individual setting has a first value (e.g., a light mode), the first selectable option is displayed with a visual indication corresponding to a first time of day (e.g., an icon representing the first virtual environment and the corresponding first time of day), such as options B1-B3 of Figure 7B (822b), and in accordance with a determination that the individual setting has a second value (e.g., a dark mode), the first selectable option is displayed with a visual indication corresponding to a second time of day (e.g., an icon representing the first virtual environment and the corresponding second time of day), such as options B1-B3 of Figure 7B (822c). In some embodiments, the three-dimensional environment includes a virtual environment selection user interface that includes one or more selectable options corresponding to virtual environments selectable for display. For example, the virtual environments selectable for display optionally include different types of virtual environments, such as a beach, a mountain environment, an urban environment, and / or an amusement park environment. In some embodiments, the selectable options displayed in the virtual environment selection user interface are displayed with respective visual indications, such as icons representing individual virtual environments (e.g., images of scenes of the virtual environment) and corresponding first and / or second times. In some embodiments, the icons representing the individual virtual environments include images of the individual virtual scenes with corresponding time appearances applied to the images. For example, a first icon representing an urban environment includes a partial image of a city at night corresponding to a second time (e.g., dark mode). In another example, a second icon representing an urban environment includes a partial image of a city at daytime corresponding to the first time (e.g., light mode). In some embodiments, the icons are unique and provide an indication that the selectable options correspond to the individual virtual environments and the corresponding first and / or second times.Displaying a visual indication in a virtual environment selection user interface that corresponds to a selectable option for a particular virtual environment and a first time or a second time clearly communicates the characteristics of the virtual environment that will be displayed if the corresponding selectable option is selected, thereby reducing errors in interacting with the computer system.

[0247] In some embodiments, the visual indication corresponding to the first time includes a visual representation of a first visual appearance of the first virtual environment corresponding to the first time (e.g., a thumbnail of the first virtual environment corresponding to the first time, such as a preview of a portion of the first virtual environment at the first time), such as when user interface 730 of FIG. 7B includes such a preview (824a). In some embodiments, the visual representation of the first visual appearance of the first virtual environment corresponding to the first time is a thumbnail that provides a preview of the first virtual environment corresponding to the first time. For example, the virtual environment selection user interface optionally includes a selectable option corresponding to a park environment and a thumbnail of the park environment with a light mode applied to the park environment. For example, the thumbnail of the park environment optionally shows a preview of the park including a brightly shining sun.

[0248] In some embodiments, the visual indication corresponding to the second time includes a visual representation of the second visual appearance of the first virtual environment corresponding to the second time (e.g., a thumbnail of the first virtual environment corresponding to the second time, such as a preview of a portion of the first virtual environment at the second time) (824b), such as when user interface 730 of FIG. 7B includes such a preview. In some embodiments, the visual representation of the second visual appearance of the first virtual environment corresponding to the second time is a thumbnail that provides a preview of the first virtual environment corresponding to the second time. Displaying selectable options of individual virtual environments and visual representations corresponding to the first time and / or the second time in a virtual environment selection user interface clearly communicates characteristics of the virtual environment that will be displayed if the corresponding selectable option is selected, thereby reducing errors in interacting with a computer system.

[0249] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first input and in accordance with a determination that the individual virtual environment is a second virtual environment different from the first virtual environment (826a), and in accordance with a determination that the individual setting of the computer system has a second value (e.g., dark mode), the computer system displays the second virtual environment within the three-dimensional environment with a third visual appearance corresponding to a third time of day in the physical space simulated by the second virtual environment, the third time of day being different from the second time of day (826b), such as a different time of day being simulated for the different virtual environment 745 in dark mode. In some embodiments, the third visual appearance optionally corresponds to a different time of night, such as dusk, midnight, and pre-dawn. In some embodiments, the third visual appearance optionally corresponds to a third size, a third brightness (or third darkness), a third opacity, a third level of clarity (or blur), and / or a third level of immersion within the three-dimensional environment. In some embodiments, the third visual appearance corresponding to the third time is associated with a darker and / or brighter visual appearance than the first visual appearance corresponding to the first time and / or the second visual appearance corresponding to the second time. In some embodiments, the third visual appearance corresponding to the third time is associated with a third amount of virtual objects in the second virtual environment corresponding to a darker visual appearance (e.g., the moon and stars illuminating the sky). Enabling the display of the second virtual environment with a third visual appearance corresponding to the third time allows for the appropriate time in a different virtual environment, thereby avoiding the virtual environment cluttering the rest of what is displayed in the user interface.

[0250] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first input and in accordance with a determination that the individual virtual environment is a second virtual environment different from the first virtual environment (828a), and in accordance with a determination that the individual setting of the computer system has a first value (e.g., bright mode), the computer system displays the second virtual environment within the three-dimensional environment with a third visual appearance corresponding to a third time of day in the physical space simulated by the second virtual environment, the third time of day being different from the first time of day (828b), such as a different time of day being simulated for the different virtual environment 745 in bright mode. In some embodiments, the third visual appearance optionally corresponds to different times of day, such as morning, afternoon, and evening. In some embodiments, the third visual appearance optionally corresponds to a third size, a third brightness (or third darkness), a third opacity, a third level of clarity (or blur), and / or a third level of immersion within the three-dimensional environment. In some embodiments, the third visual appearance corresponding to the third time is associated with a brighter and / or darker visual appearance than the first visual appearance corresponding to the first time and / or the second visual appearance corresponding to the second time. In some embodiments, the third visual appearance corresponding to the third time is associated with a third amount of virtual objects in the second virtual environment corresponding to a darker visual appearance (e.g., the moon and stars illuminating the sky). Enabling the display of the second virtual environment with a third visual appearance corresponding to the third time allows for the appropriate time in a different virtual environment, thereby avoiding the virtual environment cluttering the rest of what is displayed in the user interface.

[0251] In some embodiments, in response to detecting a first input, a physical environment of a user of the computer system is visible simultaneously with a first virtual environment (e.g., within a three-dimensional environment visible via a display generation component), such as the portion of the physical environment visible in Figure 7D (830a). In some embodiments, in response to detecting a first input (830b), in accordance with a determination that the individual settings of the computer system have a first value (e.g., light mode) and the individual virtual environment is the first virtual environment, the computer system maintains visual salience of the user's physical environment within the three-dimensional environment, such as the salience of the physical environment of Figure 7C (830c). In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the individual settings of the computer system have a second value (e.g., dark mode) and the individual virtual environment is the first virtual environment, the computer system reduces visual salience of the user's physical environment within the three-dimensional environment, such as the salience of the physical environment of Figure 7D (830d). In some embodiments, reducing the visual salience of the user's physical environment within the three-dimensional environment optionally includes reducing the brightness, opacity, and / or clarity of portions of the physical environment that are visible outside the first virtual environment within the three-dimensional environment. For example, the first virtual environment is optionally visible simultaneously with a physical environment that optionally includes a coffee table. If an individual setting of the computer system has a second value, the visual salience of the coffee table is optionally reduced. Selectively reducing or maintaining the visual salience of the physical environment within the three-dimensional environment based on the setting of the computer system reduces the number of inputs required to change the visual salience and simplifies user interaction with the computer system.

[0252] In some embodiments, the computer system receives (832) a second input via one or more input devices corresponding to a request to display an atmospheric effect to be applied to the user's physical environment visible within the three-dimensional environment, such as an input directed at E1-E3 in FIG. 7B (e.g., the second input is optionally a selection from a control center user interface and / or a virtual environment selection user interface, as described with reference to step(s) 820 and step(s) 822). In some embodiments, in response to receiving the second input, the computer system displays (832b) the physical environment with the atmospheric effect, as shown in FIG. 7F, where the visual appearance of the atmospheric effect is independent of whether the individual settings of the computer system have a first value or a second value. In some embodiments, the request to display the atmospheric effect modifies one or more visual characteristics of the physical environment such that the physical environment appears to be enhanced via color and / or exposure adjustments. In some embodiments, applying the atmospheric effect to the physical environment modifies one or more visual characteristics of the physical environment so that the physical environment appears to be located at a different time, location, and / or conditions (e.g., morning lighting instead of afternoon lighting, or sunny instead of cloudy). In some embodiments, applying the atmospheric effect to the physical environment modifies the physical environment to appear dimly lit and / or damp. Displaying the physical environment with a selected atmospheric effect provides a fast and efficient way to provide an immersive experience while maintaining visibility of the physical environment, thus facilitating interaction between the user and the physical environment and simplifying user interaction with the computer system.

[0253] In some embodiments, when a second input is received (e.g., the second input is optionally a selection from the virtual environment selection user interface, as described with reference to step(s) 822), the computer system displays the virtual environment selection user interface in front of one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment, and the second input is directed to the virtual environment selection user interface (834a), as shown in FIG. 7B. In some embodiments, in response to receiving the second input, the computer system updates the visual appearance of the one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment to correspond to the atmospheric effect (834b), as shown in FIG. 7F. In some embodiments, the three-dimensional environment includes a virtual environment selection user interface that optionally includes one or more elements directed to one or more atmospheric effects. For example, when a first element targeted for a first atmospheric effect is selected, the first element is optionally highlighted and / or includes a visual indication that the first atmospheric effect has been selected, and portions of the environment displayed behind and / or around the virtual environment selection user interface are updated to appear with the selected atmospheric effect. Updating one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment to correspond to a selected atmospheric effect provides a quick and efficient way for a user to determine which atmospheric effect is currently applied to the physical environment, thus reducing the number of inputs required to determine which atmospheric effect is selected, thereby simplifying user interaction with the computer system.

[0254] In some embodiments, the computer system receives (836a), via one or more input devices, a second input corresponding to a request to display a first type of virtual content (e.g., a personalized virtual environment generated by a first application at the computer system), where the personalized virtual environment corresponds to a second type of virtual content different from the first type (e.g., the personalized virtual environment generated by a second application at the computer system). In some embodiments, in response to receiving the second input, the computer system displays (836b), via a display generation component, the first type of virtual content, such as displaying user interface 726 of FIGS. 7C and 7D , regardless of whether the personalized setting has a first value or a second value. In some embodiments, the first type of virtual content is optionally a video application or any other application including three-dimensional content. In some embodiments, the visual appearance in which the first type of virtual content is displayed is independent of the first value and the second value. For example, if the first type of virtual content is a video player application, then individual time settings (e.g., light mode and / or dark mode) are optionally not applied to the content being displayed by the video player application. In some embodiments, in response to an input corresponding to a request to display the individual virtual content (e.g., a virtual environment), if the individual virtual content is of the first type, then the individual virtual content is displayed in light mode or dark mode (e.g., as described with reference to step(s) 802) regardless of whether the individual time settings have a first value or a second value (e.g., the selection of light mode or dark mode is defined by the individual virtual content). In some embodiments, if the individual virtual content is of the second type, then the individual virtual content is displayed in light mode or dark mode (e.g., as described with reference to step(s) 802) depending on whether the individual time settings have a first value or a second value (e.g., as described with reference to step(s) 802).Displaying the first type of virtual content regardless of whether the individual settings have a first value or a second value ensures that time settings are not applied when they are not appropriate, reducing the need for input to correct such application, thereby simplifying user interaction with the computer system.

[0255] In some embodiments, the first type of virtual content is displayed (838a) simultaneously with one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment (e.g., portions of the physical environment and / or the distinct virtual environment) outside of the first type of virtual content, as shown outside of user interface 726 in Figures 7C-7D. In some embodiments, in response to receiving a second input (838b), in accordance with a determination that the distinct setting has a first value (e.g., light mode), the computer system displays (838c) one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment in a first distinct visual appearance, such as the appearance of the portion outside of user interface 726 in Figure 7C. In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the distinct setting has a second value (e.g., dark mode), the computer system displays (838d) one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment in a second distinct visual appearance different from the first distinct visual appearance, such as the appearance of the portion outside of user interface 726 in Figure 7D. In some embodiments, the first type of virtual content is optionally a video application or any other application including three-dimensional content, and selecting the first value and / or the second value does not change the visual appearance of the first type of virtual content. For example, the three-dimensional environment includes a video application for displaying three-dimensional content and a separate virtual environment surrounding the video application. When the separate setting is selected to be a first value (e.g., light mode), selecting the first value changes the visual appearance of the separate virtual environment to correspond to the light mode, but the visual appearance of the video application is optionally not changed. Displaying the first type of virtual content regardless of whether the separate setting changes to the first value or the second value ensures that time settings are not applied when inappropriate while maintaining the ability to modify the visual appearance of the separate virtual environment, thereby simplifying user interaction with the computer system.

[0256] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first input, the physical environment of the user of the computer system is visible simultaneously with the first virtual environment (840a), as in Figure 7B. In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first input (840b), in accordance with a determination that the individual setting of the computer system has a first value and the individual virtual environment is the first virtual environment, the computer system reduces the visual salience of the user's physical environment within the three-dimensional environment by a first amount (e.g., as described with reference to step(s) 830), such as reducing the salience of the physical environment of Figure 7C (840c). In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the individual setting of the computer system has a second value and the individual virtual environment is the first virtual environment, the computer system reduces the visual salience of the user's physical environment within the three-dimensional environment by a second amount different from the first amount (e.g., as described with reference to step(s) 830), such as reducing the salience of the physical environment of Figure 7D (840d). In some embodiments, a computer system having a first value reduces the visual salience of the physical environment by a first amount, and a computer system having a second value reduces the visual salience of the physical environment by a second amount. Selectively reducing the visual salience of the physical environment by the first amount or the second amount based on a setting of the computer system reduces the number of inputs required to change the visual salience of the physical environment to correspond to the visual appearance of a particular virtual environment, simplifying user interaction with the computer system.

[0257] In some embodiments, while displaying the first virtual environment via the display generation component, the computer system receives (842a) a second input via one or more input devices corresponding to a request to change the immersion level of the first virtual environment from the first immersion level to a second immersion level different from the first immersion level (e.g., a request to change the immersion level from 25% to 75%), the second input being directed to a hardware input element in communication with the computer system, such as a button on the computer system 101 (e.g., pressing a physical button on the computer system or rotating a physical dial on the computer system).

[0258] In some embodiments, in response to receiving the second input, the computer system displays (842b) the first virtual environment with a second immersion level, as shown in Figures 7D-7E. In some embodiments, the immersion is the immersion described with reference to methods 1400, 1600, and / or 1800. In some embodiments, the amount of the virtual environment displayed (e.g., the amount of the physical environment not displayed) is based on the immersion level. For example, increasing the immersion level optionally causes more of the virtual environment to be displayed, replacing and / or obscuring more of the physical environment, and decreasing the immersion level optionally causes less of the virtual environment to be displayed, revealing portions of the physical environment that were not previously displayed and / or obscured. In some embodiments, at a particular immersion level, one or more first background objects are visually less highlighted (e.g., dimmed, blurred, and / or displayed with increased transparency) than one or more second background objects, and one or more third background objects are discontinued. In some embodiments, the immersion level includes the relative extent to which the virtual content (e.g., the virtual environment and / or virtual content) displayed by the computer system obscures background content (e.g., content other than the virtual environment and / or virtual content) around / behind the virtual content, and optionally includes the number of items of background content displayed, and / or the visual characteristics (e.g., color, contrast, and / or opacity) at which the background content is displayed, the angular range of the virtual content displayed via the display generating components (e.g., 60-degree content displayed at low immersion, 120-degree content displayed at medium immersion, or 180-degree content displayed at high immersion), and / or the percentage of the field of view displayed via the display generating components that is consumed by the virtual content (e.g., 33% of the field of view consumed by the virtual content at low immersion, 66% of the field of view consumed by the virtual content at medium immersion, or 100% of the field of view consumed by the virtual content at high immersion). In some embodiments, the background content is included in the background against which the virtual content is displayed.In some embodiments, background content includes user interfaces (e.g., user interfaces generated by a computer system corresponding to an application), virtual objects (e.g., files or representations of other users generated by a computer system) that are not associated with or included in the virtual environment and / or virtual content, and / or real objects (e.g., pass-through objects that represent real objects in the physical environment around the user that are visible as displayed through the display generating components and / or that are visible through transparent or translucent components of the display generating components because the computer system does not obscure / prevent their visibility through the display generating components). In some embodiments, at a low immersion level (e.g., a first immersion level), background, virtual, and / or real objects are displayed in an unobscured manner. For example, a virtual environment at a low immersion level is optionally displayed simultaneously with background content, and the background content is optionally displayed at full brightness, color, and / or translucency. In some embodiments, at a higher immersion level (e.g., a second immersion level higher than the first immersion level), background, virtual, and / or real objects are displayed in an obscured manner (e.g., dimmed, blurred, or removed from the display). For example, a separate virtual environment having a high immersion level is displayed without simultaneously displaying background content (e.g., in full screen or fully immersive mode). As another example, a virtual environment displayed at an intermediate immersion level is simultaneously displayed with dimmed, blurred, or otherwise de-highlighted background content. In some embodiments, the visual characteristics of the background objects differ among the background objects. For example, at a particular immersion level, one or more first background objects are visually less highlighted (e.g., dimmed, blurred, and / or displayed with increasing transparency) than one or more second background objects, and one or more third background objects are discontinued.Adjusting the immersion level using physical input elements provides a fast and efficient way to adjust immersion, improving the usability of computer systems and making the user-device interface more efficient.

[0259] In some embodiments, while displaying the first virtual environment via the display generation components, the computer system receives (844) a second input via one or more input devices corresponding to a request to change the immersion level of the first virtual environment from the first immersion level to a second immersion level different from the first immersion level (e.g., a request to change the immersion level from 25% to 50%), the second input being directed to a control center user interface display...

Claims

1. 1. A method comprising: A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, comprising: receiving, via the one or more input devices, a first input corresponding to a request to display a separate virtual environment representing a simulated physical space while a three-dimensional environment is visible via the display generation component; In response to detecting the first input, displaying, in accordance with a determination that the individual setting of the computer system has a first value and the individual virtual environment is a first virtual environment, the first virtual environment within the three-dimensional environment having a first visual appearance corresponding to a first time in the physical space simulated by the first virtual environment; and displaying, in accordance with a determination that the individual setting of the computer system has a second value different from the first value and that the individual virtual environment is the first virtual environment, within the three-dimensional environment the first virtual environment having a second visual appearance corresponding to a second time in the physical space simulated by the first virtual environment, wherein the second visual appearance is different from the first visual appearance and the second time is different from the first time.

2. displaying the first virtual environment having the first visual appearance corresponding to the first time includes displaying the first virtual environment with simulated lighting corresponding to the first time; 10. The method of claim 1, wherein displaying the first virtual environment with the second visual appearance corresponding to the second time comprises displaying the first virtual environment with simulated lighting corresponding to the second time.

3. The method of claim 2 , wherein the simulated lighting comprises simulated natural lighting from a simulated natural light source.

4. displaying the first virtual environment having the first visual appearance includes displaying a first virtual element in the first virtual environment virtually illuminated by the simulated lighting corresponding to the first time; 4. The method of claim 2 or 3, wherein displaying the second virtual environment having the second visual appearance comprises displaying the first virtual element within the first virtual environment virtually illuminated by the simulated lighting corresponding to the second time of day.

5. The method of claim 1 , wherein the individual settings are selected based on user input.

6. 6. The method of claim 1, wherein the individual setting having the first value or the second value is subject to automatic determination by the computer system without detecting an input corresponding to selection of the first value or the second value.

7. The automatic determination by the computer system is automatically setting the first value for the individual setting in accordance with determining that a current time at the computer system is a first time; 7. The method of claim 6, further comprising: automatically setting the second value for the individual setting in accordance with a determination that the current time at the computer system is a second time that is different from the first time.

8. The automatic determination by the computer system is automatically setting the first value for the individual setting in accordance with a determination in the computer system that a level of illumination in the physical space is a first level of illumination; and automatically setting the second value for the individual setting in accordance with a determination in the computer system that the level of illumination in the physical space is a second level of illumination that is different from the first level of illumination.

9. 9. The method of claim 1, further comprising, prior to displaying the first virtual environment having the first visual appearance or the second visual appearance, displaying, via the display generation component, a control center user interface including one or more selectable options selectable for setting the individual settings for controlling one or more functions of the computer system to the first value or the second value.

10. 10. The method of claim 9, further comprising: receiving, while displaying the control center user interface via the display generation component, a second input via the one or more input devices directed at the one or more selectable options; setting the individual setting to the first value or the second value according to the second input; and ceasing to display the control center user interface.

11. further comprising displaying, via the display generation component, a virtual environment selection user interface, the virtual environment selection user interface including a first selectable option selectable to display the first virtual environment; responsive to a determination that the individual setting has the first value, the first selectable option is displayed with a visual indication corresponding to the first time; 11. The method of claim 1, wherein, in accordance with a determination that the individual setting has the second value, the first selectable option is displayed with a visual indication corresponding to the second time.

12. the visual indication corresponding to the first time includes a visual representation of the first visual appearance of the first virtual environment corresponding to the first time; The method of claim 11 , wherein the visual indication corresponding to the second time comprises a visual representation of the second visual appearance of the first virtual environment corresponding to the second time.

13. in response to detecting the first input and in accordance with a determination that the distinct virtual environment is a second virtual environment different from the first virtual environment; 13. The method of claim 1, further comprising, in accordance with a determination that the individual setting of the computer system has the second value, displaying within the three-dimensional environment a second virtual environment having a third visual appearance corresponding to a third time in the physical space simulated by the second virtual environment, the third time being different from the second time.

14. in response to detecting the first input and in accordance with a determination that the distinct virtual environment is a second virtual environment different from the first virtual environment; 14. The method of claim 1, further comprising, in accordance with a determination that the individual setting of the computer system has the first value, displaying within the three-dimensional environment a second virtual environment having a third visual appearance corresponding to a third time in the physical space simulated by the second virtual environment, the third time being different from the first time.

15. In response to detecting the first input, a physical environment of a user of the computer system is simultaneously visible with the first virtual environment, and the method further comprises: In response to detecting the first input, maintaining visual salience of the user's physical environment within the three-dimensional environment in accordance with the determination that the personalized setting of the computer system has the first value and the personalized virtual environment is the first virtual environment; 15. The method of claim 1, further comprising: reducing the visual salience of the user's physical environment within the three-dimensional environment in accordance with the determination that the individual setting of the computer system has the second value and the individual virtual environment is the first virtual environment.

16. receiving a second input via the one or more input devices corresponding to a request to display an atmospheric effect to be applied to the user's physical surroundings visible within the three-dimensional environment; 16. The method of claim 1, further comprising: in response to receiving the second input, displaying the physical environment with the atmospheric effect, wherein the visual appearance of the atmospheric effect is independent of whether the individual setting of the computer system has the first value or the second value.

17. When the second input is received, the computer system displays a virtual environment selection user interface in front of one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment, and the second input is directed to the virtual environment selection user interface, the method further comprising:

17. The method of claim 16, further comprising, in response to receiving the second input, updating the visual appearance of the one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment to correspond to the atmospheric effect.

18. receiving, via the one or more input devices, a second input corresponding to a request to display virtual content of a first type, the separate virtual environment corresponding to virtual content of a second type different from the first type; 18. The method of claim 1, further comprising: in response to receiving the second input, displaying, via the display generation component, the virtual content of the first type, regardless of whether the individual setting has the first value or the second value.

19. The virtual content of the first type is displayed simultaneously with one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment outside the virtual content of the first type, and the method further comprises: In response to receiving the second input, displaying the one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment in a first distinct visual appearance in accordance with determining that the distinct setting has the first value; 20. The method of claim 18, further comprising: displaying the one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment in a second individual visual appearance different from the first individual visual appearance in accordance with a determination that the individual setting has the second value.

20. In response to detecting the first input, a physical environment of a user of the computer system is simultaneously visible with the first virtual environment, and the method further comprises: In response to detecting the first input, reducing the visual salience of the user's physical environment within the three-dimensional environment by a first amount in accordance with the determination that the individual setting of the computer system has the first value and the individual virtual environment is the first virtual environment; 20. The method of claim 1, further comprising: reducing the visual salience of the user's physical environment within the three-dimensional environment by a second amount different from the first amount in accordance with the determination that the individual setting of the computer system has the second value and the individual virtual environment is the first virtual environment.

21. receiving, while displaying the first virtual environment via the display generation component, a second input via the one or more input devices corresponding to a request to change an immersion level of the first virtual environment from a first immersion level to a second immersion level different from the first immersion level, the second input being directed to a hardware input element in communication with the computer system; 21. The method of claim 1, further comprising: displaying the first virtual environment at the second level of immersion in response to receiving the second input.

22. receiving, while displaying the first virtual environment via the display generation component, a second input via the one or more input devices corresponding to a request to change an immersion level of the first virtual environment from a first immersion level to a second immersion level different from the first immersion level, the second input directed to a control center user interface displayed via the display generation component; 22. The method of claim 1, further comprising: displaying the first virtual environment at the second level of immersion in response to receiving the second input.

23. While the first virtual environment is not visible through the display generation component, receiving a second input via the one or more input devices corresponding to a request to change the individual setting from having the first value to having the second value; 23. The method of claim 1, further comprising: in response to receiving the second input, changing the individual setting from having the first value to having the second value.

24. displaying, via the display generation component, a selectable element for adjusting a volume of audio generated by the computer system corresponding to the first virtual environment; and receiving, while displaying the selectable element, a second input directed toward the selectable element via the one or more input devices; 24. The method of claim 1, further comprising: in response to receiving the second input, adjusting the volume of the audio corresponding to the first virtual environment in accordance with the second input.

25. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and one or more programs stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions, the instructions receiving, via the one or more input devices, a first input corresponding to a request to display a separate virtual environment representing a simulated physical space while a three-dimensional environment is visible via the display generation component; In response to detecting the first input, pursuant to determining that the individual setting of the computer system has a first value and that the individual virtual environment is a first virtual environment, displaying within the three-dimensional environment the first virtual environment having a first visual appearance corresponding to a first time in the physical space simulated by the first virtual environment; A computer system that, in accordance with a determination that the individual setting of the computer system has a second value different from the first value and that the individual virtual environment is the first virtual environment, displays the first virtual environment within the three-dimensional environment having a second visual appearance corresponding to a second time in the physical space simulated by the first virtual environment, wherein the second visual appearance is different from the first visual appearance and the second time is different from the first time.

26. 1. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generating component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to: receiving, via the one or more input devices, a first input corresponding to a request to display a separate virtual environment representing a simulated physical space while a three-dimensional environment is visible via the display generation component; In response to detecting the first input, displaying, in accordance with a determination that the individual setting of the computer system has a first value and the individual virtual environment is a first virtual environment, the first virtual environment within the three-dimensional environment having a first visual appearance corresponding to a first time in the physical space simulated by the first virtual environment; and in accordance with a determination that the individual setting of the computer system has a second value different from the first value and that the individual virtual environment is the first virtual environment, displaying within the three-dimensional environment the first virtual environment having a second visual appearance corresponding to a second time in the physical space simulated by the first virtual environment, wherein the second visual appearance is different from the first visual appearance and the second time is different from the first time.

27. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and means for receiving, via the one or more input devices, a first input corresponding to a request to display a separate virtual environment representing a simulated physical space while a three-dimensional environment is visible via the display generation component; In response to detecting the first input, pursuant to determining that the individual setting of the computer system has a first value and that the individual virtual environment is a first virtual environment, displaying within the three-dimensional environment the first virtual environment having a first visual appearance corresponding to a first time in the physical space simulated by the first virtual environment; and means for displaying, in the three-dimensional environment, the first virtual environment having a second visual appearance corresponding to a second time in the physical space simulated by the first virtual environment in accordance with a determination that the individual setting of the computer system has a second value different from the first value and that the individual virtual environment is the first virtual environment, wherein the second visual appearance is different from the first visual appearance and the second time is different from the first time.

28. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and and one or more programs stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any one of claims 1 to 24.

29. 25. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generating component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to perform the method of any one of claims 1 to 24.

30. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and and means for executing the method of any one of claims 1 to 24.

31. 1. A method comprising: A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, comprising: displaying a three-dimensional environment, including a virtual environment, via the display generation component; detecting an event associated with automatic dimming of one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment while displaying the virtual environment representing a simulated physical space, and in response to detecting the event associated with automatic dimming of one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment, updating the display of the virtual environment to be displayed with a visual appearance corresponding to a first time in the simulated physical space that is outside a set of times, the second time being within the set of times, the second time being different from the first time, in accordance with a determination that the virtual environment is displayed with a visual appearance corresponding to a first time in the simulated physical space that is outside a set of times; and continuing to display the virtual environment in the visual appearance corresponding to the individual time in the simulated physical space in accordance with a determination that the virtual environment is displayed in the visual appearance corresponding to the individual time in the simulated physical space within the set of times.

32. detecting, while not displaying the virtual environment and while automatic dimming of the one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment is active, via the one or more input devices, a second event associated with displaying the virtual environment; 32. The method of claim 31 , comprising: in response to detecting the second event associated with displaying the virtual environment, displaying the virtual environment in the simulated physical space with the visual appearance corresponding to the second time.

33. displaying, via the display generation component, the three-dimensional environment including a second virtual environment different from the virtual environment, the second virtual environment representing a second simulated physical space; detecting a second event associated with automatic dimming of one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment while displaying the second virtual environment; in response to detecting the second event associated with automatic dimming of one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment; 33. The method of claim 31 or 32, further comprising: updating a display of the second virtual environment to be displayed with a visual appearance corresponding to a fourth time in the simulated physical space that is within the set of times in accordance with a determination that the second virtual environment is displayed with a visual appearance corresponding to a third time in the second simulated physical space that is outside the set of times, wherein the fourth time is different from the third time.

34. 34. The method of any one of claims 31 to 33, wherein the event associated with automatic dimming comprises the start of playback of content.

35. 35. The method of claim 34, wherein the visual appearance of the virtual environment is updated in accordance with the determination that the virtual environment is displayed with the visual appearance corresponding to the first time, regardless of whether the event is associated with a first application or a second application different from the first application.

36. 36. The method of any one of claims 31 to 35, wherein an option to change automatic dimming settings is displayed in a content playback user interface associated with the playback of the content.

37. 37. The method of any one of claims 31 to 36, wherein an option to change the automatic dimming setting is displayed in a control user interface of the computer system.

38. The virtual environment is displayed simultaneously with a virtual object associated with the event in the three-dimensional environment and a representation of a physical environment of a user of the computer system, the virtual object being distinct from the virtual environment, the method comprising:

38. The method of any one of claims 31 to 37, further comprising reducing the visual salience of the representation of the physical environment of the user in response to detecting the event associated with automatic dimming of one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment.

39. 39. The method of claim 38, wherein reducing the visual salience of the representation of the user's physical environment comprises modifying the visual appearance of the representation of the user's physical environment based on the visual appearance of the virtual environment corresponding to the second time.

40. detecting a second event while displaying the virtual environment that is not associated with automatic dimming of one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment; 40. The method of claim 31, further comprising: in response to detecting the second event not associated with automatic dimming, continuing the display of the virtual environment in the visual appearance corresponding to the second time in accordance with a determination that the virtual environment is being displayed in the simulated physical space in the visual appearance corresponding to the second time.

41. In response to detecting the event associated with automatic dimming, 41. The method of any one of claims 31 to 40, comprising, in accordance with a determination that the virtual environment is being displayed in the visual appearance corresponding to the second time, continuing the display of the virtual environment in the visual appearance corresponding to the second time.

42. Detecting the event associated with automatic dimming of one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment includes:

42. The method of claim 31, further comprising: detecting, in accordance with a determination that the event is associated with playback of three-dimensional content, that the event is associated with automatic dimming, regardless of whether automatic dimming is enabled or disabled in the computer system.

43. detecting a discrete event while displaying the three-dimensional environment, including one or more virtual effects applied to the user's physical environment, via the display generation component; 43. The method of claim 31, further comprising: reducing visual salience of portions of the physical environment in response to detecting the discrete event and in accordance with a determination that the discrete event is associated with automatic dimming.

44. 44. The method of claim 43, comprising ceasing to reduce the visual conspicuousness of the portion of the physical environment in response to detecting the discrete event and in accordance with a determination that the discrete event is not associated with automatic dimming.

45. the event is associated with the playback of content contained in the three-dimensional environment; 45. The method of any one of claims 31 to 44, further comprising, in response to detecting the event associated with automatic dimming and in accordance with a determination that one or more criteria are met, displaying within the three-dimensional environment one or more virtual lighting effects generated based on the content displayed within the virtual environment, wherein the one or more virtual lighting effects are applied to one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment outside the content.

46. detecting, via the one or more input devices, that attention of a user of the computer system is not directed to the virtual object associated with the event while displaying the virtual environment with the visual appearance corresponding to the second time and while portions of the three-dimensional environment outside the virtual object associated with the event have reduced visual salience; In response to detecting that the user's attention is not directed to the virtual object associated with the event, continuing the display of the virtual environment with the visual appearance corresponding to the second time; and and increasing the visual salience of the portion of the virtual environment outside the virtual object associated with the event.

47. The event is associated with content displayed within the three-dimensional environment, and the method comprises: detecting a change in the state of the content while displaying the virtual environment with the visual appearance corresponding to the second time in the simulated physical space; 47. The method of any one of claims 31 to 46, further comprising: in response to detecting the change in state of the content, updating the display of the virtual environment to have the visual appearance corresponding to the first time in the simulated physical space.

48. The event is associated with content displayed within the three-dimensional environment, and the method comprises: detecting a change in the state of the content while displaying the virtual environment with the visual appearance corresponding to the second time in the simulated physical space; 47. The method of any one of claims 31 to 46, further comprising: in response to detecting the change in state of the content, maintaining, within the simulated physical space, the display of the virtual environment with the visual appearance corresponding to the second time.

49. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and one or more programs stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions, the instructions displaying a three-dimensional environment, including a virtual environment, via said display generation component; detecting an event associated with automatic dimming of one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment while displaying the virtual environment representing a simulated physical space, and in response to detecting the event associated with automatic dimming of one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment, updating the display of the virtual environment to be displayed with a visual appearance corresponding to a second time in the simulated physical space that is within the set of times, the second time being different from the first time, in accordance with a determination that the virtual environment is displayed with a visual appearance corresponding to a first time in the simulated physical space that is outside the set of times; The computer system continues displaying the virtual environment with the visual appearance corresponding to the individual time in the simulated physical space in accordance with a determination that the virtual environment is displayed with the visual appearance corresponding to the individual time in the simulated physical space within the set of times.

50. 1. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generating component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to: displaying a three-dimensional environment, including a virtual environment, via the display generation component; detecting an event associated with automatic dimming of one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment while displaying the virtual environment representing a simulated physical space, and in response to detecting the event associated with automatic dimming of one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment, updating the display of the virtual environment to be displayed with a visual appearance corresponding to a first time in the simulated physical space that is outside a set of times, the second time being within the set of times, the second time being different from the first time, in accordance with a determination that the virtual environment is displayed with a visual appearance corresponding to a first time in the simulated physical space that is outside a set of times; and continuing to display the virtual environment with the visual appearance that corresponds to the individual time in the simulated physical space in accordance with a determination that the virtual environment is displayed with the visual appearance that corresponds to the individual time in the simulated physical space within the set of times.

51. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and means for displaying a three-dimensional environment, including a virtual environment, via said display generation component; detecting an event associated with automatic dimming of one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment while displaying the virtual environment representing a simulated physical space, and in response to detecting the event associated with automatic dimming of one or more portions of the three-dimensional environment, updating the display of the virtual environment to be displayed with a visual appearance corresponding to a second time in the simulated physical space that is within the set of times, the second time being different from the first time, in accordance with a determination that the virtual environment is displayed with a visual appearance corresponding to a first time in the simulated physical space that is outside the set of times; means for continuing to display the virtual environment with the visual appearance corresponding to the individual time in the simulated physical space in accordance with a determination that the virtual environment is displayed with the visual appearance corresponding to the individual time in the simulated physical space within the set of times.

52. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and and one or more programs stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any one of claims 31 to 48.

53. 50. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generating component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to perform the method of any one of claims 31 to 48.

54. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and and means for executing the method of any one of claims 31 to 48.

55. 1. A method comprising: A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, comprising: While a three-dimensional environment is viewable through the display generation component, receiving a first user input via the one or more input devices corresponding to a request to display individual media content within the three-dimensional environment in an expanded display mode in which the individual media content occupies a larger portion of the user's field of view than when the individual media content is displayed in a compact display mode; In response to receiving the first user input, displaying within the three-dimensional environment a virtual environment selection user interface including a first selectable option selectable for displaying the respective media content within a first virtual environment in the augmented display mode via the display generation component; receiving, while displaying the virtual environment selection user interface, a second user input via the one or more input devices corresponding to a selection of a respective selectable option; and in response to receiving the second user input, displaying, via the display generation component, the respective media content within the first virtual environment corresponding to the first selectable option in accordance with a determination that the second user input selects the first selectable option.

56. 56. The method of claim 55, wherein when the first user input for displaying the individual media content in the expanded display mode is detected, the individual media content is displayed in the compact display mode, and displaying the individual media content in the expanded display mode includes replacing the display of the individual media content in the compact display mode with the individual media content in the expanded display mode.

57. 56. The method of claim 55, wherein the individual media content is not displayed when the first user input for displaying the individual media content in the extended display mode is detected, and displaying the individual media content in the extended display mode includes displaying the individual media content in the three-dimensional environment after receiving the first input.

58. 58. The method of any one of claims 55 to 57, wherein the virtual environment selection user interface includes a plurality of selectable options, including the first selectable option and a second selectable option that is selectable to display the individual media content in a second virtual environment that is different from the first virtual environment.

59. 59. The method of claim 58, further comprising, in response to receiving the second user input, displaying, via the display generation component, the respective media content within the second virtual environment corresponding to the second selectable option in accordance with a determination that the second user input selects the second selectable option.

60. In response to a determination that the respective media content is first media content, the virtual environment selection user interface includes a first set of one or more selectable options corresponding to a first set of one or more virtual environments based on the first media content; 60. The method of claim 55 to 59, wherein, in accordance with a determination that the individual media content is second media content different from the first media content, the virtual environment selection user interface includes a second set of one or more selectable options corresponding to a second set of one or more virtual environments based on the second media content.

61. 61. The method of claim 60, wherein the first set of one or more virtual environments includes a distinct virtual environment not included in the second set of one or more virtual environments.

62. 62. The method of claim 61, wherein the personalized virtual environment is received by the computer system along with the first media content.

63. 63. The method of any one of claims 60 to 62, wherein the first media content corresponds to a first portion of the individual media content and the second media content corresponds to a second portion of the individual media content that is different from the first portion.

64. 64. The method of any one of claims 55 to 63, further comprising displaying the individual media content within a system default environment in response to receiving a second user input corresponding to a selection of a second selectable option, wherein the virtual environment selection user interface includes the second selectable option.

65. 65. The method of any one of claims 55 to 64, further comprising, in response to receiving a second user input corresponding to a selection of a second selectable option, displaying the individual media content within the individual virtual environment currently selected by the user, wherein the virtual environment selection user interface includes the second selectable option.

66. 66. The method of any one of claims 55 to 65, further comprising, in response to receiving a second user input corresponding to a selection of a second selectable option, displaying the individual media content within the individual virtual environment having a visual appearance corresponding to a first time in the physical space simulated by the individual virtual environment, wherein the virtual environment selection user interface includes the second selectable option.

67. The discrete media content does not include three-dimensional content, and the method further comprises: receiving, via the one or more input devices, a third user input corresponding to a request to display second distinct media content, wherein when the third user input is received, the second distinct media content is not displayed within the three-dimensional environment; In response to receiving the third user input, displaying the second individual media content in the extended presentation mode in accordance with a determination that the second individual media content includes three-dimensional content; 67. The method of any one of claims 55 to 66, further comprising: displaying the second individual media content in a compact display mode in accordance with a determination that the second individual media content does not include three-dimensional content.

68. displaying the first virtual environment with a first visual appearance corresponding to a first time based on a time setting defined by the user while displaying the first virtual environment while the respective media content is not being displayed in the extended display mode; 68. The method of any one of claims 55 to 67, further comprising, while displaying the individual media content in the extended display mode, displaying the first virtual environment with a second visual appearance corresponding to a second time that is not based on the time setting defined by the user.

69. in response to receiving the second user input corresponding to the selection of the first selectable option; updating the system virtual environment to the first virtual environment in accordance with a determination that one or more criteria are satisfied, including criteria that are satisfied when the first virtual environment is available as a system virtual environment; 69. The method of any one of claims 55 to 68, further comprising: canceling updating the system virtual environment to the first virtual environment in accordance with a determination that the one or more criteria are not satisfied.

70. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and one or more programs stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions, the instructions receiving, while a three-dimensional environment is viewable through the display generation component, a first user input via the one or more input devices corresponding to a request to display individual media content within the three-dimensional environment in an expanded display mode in which the individual media content occupies a larger portion of the user's field of view than when the individual media content is displayed in a compact display mode; In response to receiving the first user input, display within the three-dimensional environment a virtual environment selection user interface including a first selectable option selectable to display the respective media content within a first virtual environment in the augmented display mode via the display generation component; receiving, while displaying the virtual environment selection user interface, a second user input via the one or more input devices corresponding to a selection of a respective selectable option; and, in response to receiving the second user input, displaying, via the display generation component, the respective media content within the first virtual environment corresponding to the first selectable option in accordance with a determination that the second user input selected the first selectable option.

71. 1. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generating component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to: While a three-dimensional environment is viewable through the display generation component, receiving a first user input via the one or more input devices corresponding to a request to display individual media content within the three-dimensional environment in an expanded display mode in which the individual media content occupies a larger portion of the user's field of view than when the individual media content is displayed in a compact display mode; In response to receiving the first user input, displaying within the three-dimensional environment a virtual environment selection user interface including a first selectable option selectable for displaying the respective media content within a first virtual environment in the augmented display mode via the display generation component; receiving, while displaying the virtual environment selection user interface, a second user input via the one or more input devices corresponding to a selection of a respective selectable option; and in response to receiving the second user input, displaying, via the display generation component, the respective media content within the first virtual environment corresponding to the first selectable option in accordance with a determination that the second user input selected the first selectable option.

72. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and means for receiving, while a three-dimensional environment is viewable through the display generation component, a first user input via the one or more input devices corresponding to a request to display individual media content within the three-dimensional environment in an expanded display mode in which the individual media content occupies a larger portion of the user's field of view than when the individual media content is displayed in a compact display mode; means for displaying, in response to receiving the first user input, within the three-dimensional environment via the display generation component in the augmented display mode, a virtual environment selection user interface including a first selectable option selectable for displaying the respective media content within a first virtual environment; means for receiving, while displaying the virtual environment selection user interface, a second user input via the one or more input devices corresponding to a selection of a respective selectable option; means for displaying, in response to receiving the second user input, via the display generation component, the respective media content within the first virtual environment corresponding to the first selectable option in accordance with a determination that the second user input selects the first selectable option.

73. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and and one or more programs stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any one of claims 55 to 69.

74. 70. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generating component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to perform the method of any one of claims 55 to 69.

75. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and and means for executing the method of any one of claims 55 to 69.

76. 1. A method comprising: A first computer system having a display generation component and one or more input devices, displaying a first virtual environment via the display generation component; receiving, while displaying the first virtual environment, a first input via the one or more input devices by the first user of the first computer system corresponding to a request to join a communications session including a second user of a second computer system different from the first computer system, the second computer system displaying a second virtual environment different from the first virtual environment; in response to receiving the first input, participating in the communication session with the user of the second computer system while maintaining a display of the first virtual environment via the display generation component, wherein the first user of the first computer system is in communication with a spatial representation of the second user located at a distinct location within the first virtual environment; the spatial representation of the second user moves within the first virtual environment based on movement of the second user; The second computer system maintains a display of the second virtual environment after the first computer system joins the communication session with the user of the second computer system, the second user of the second computer system communicating with a spatial representation of the first user located within the second virtual environment, and the spatial representation of the first user moving within the second virtual environment based on movement of the first user.

77. detecting that one or more criteria are met while the first computer system and the second computer system are in the communication session, the first computer system displaying the first virtual environment and the second computer system displaying the second virtual environment; 77. The method of claim 76, further comprising: in response to detecting that the one or more criteria are met, displaying, via the display generation component, a separate shared virtual environment shared by the first computer system and the second computer system during the communication session, wherein the spatial representation of the second user is displayed by the first computer system within the separate shared virtual environment, and the spatial representation of the first user is displayed by the second computer system within the separate shared virtual environment while the separate shared virtual environment is shared by the first computer system and the second computer system during the communication session.

78. 78. The method of claim 77, wherein the one or more criteria include a criterion that is met when the first computer system receives an indication that the second computer system has switched from displaying the second virtual environment to displaying the individual shared virtual environment during the communication session.

79. the one or more criteria include a criterion that is satisfied when a second input corresponding to a request to confirm the display of the individual shared virtual environment at the first computer system is received, the method comprising: receiving, while the first computer system and the second computer system are in the communication session and displaying the first virtual environment via the display generation component, an indication that the second computer system has changed from displaying the second virtual environment to displaying the individual shared virtual environment that is different from the first virtual environment; displaying, via the display generation component, a confirmation user interface for confirming the display of the individual shared virtual environment at the first computer system in response to receiving the indication that the second computer system has changed from displaying the second virtual environment to displaying the individual shared virtual environment; 78. The method of claim 77, further comprising: while displaying the confirmation user interface and the first virtual environment, receiving, via the one or more input devices, the second input corresponding to the request to confirm the display of the individual shared virtual environment on the first computer system.

80. 80. The method of any one of claims 77 to 79, wherein the one or more criteria include criteria that are met when the individual shared virtual environment is downloaded to the first computer system.

81. The one or more criteria include a criterion that is satisfied when a second input for sharing the individual shared virtual environment is detected at the first computer system, and the method further comprises: displaying, via the display generation component, an informational user interface for the communication session for controlling one or more characteristics of the communication session while the first computer system and the second computer system are engaged in the communication session; 81. The method of any one of claims 77 to 80, further comprising receiving, while displaying the information user interface, the second input directed to the information user interface via the one or more input devices.

82. receiving, via the one or more input devices, a second input corresponding to a request to switch from displaying the first virtual environment to displaying a third virtual environment different from the first virtual environment before the one or more criteria are met; In response to receiving the second input, 82. The method of any one of claims 77 to 81, further comprising: in accordance with determining that the first computer system and the second computer system are in the communication session, displaying, via the display generation component, a virtual environment sharing user interface to indicate whether the third virtual environment should be shared with the second computer system during the communication session, wherein the one or more criteria include a criterion that is satisfied when input is received at the first computer system confirming that the third virtual environment will be shared with the second computer system during the communication session as the individual shared virtual environment.

83. 83. The method of claim 82, wherein the virtual environment sharing user interface includes a first selectable option selectable to share the third virtual environment with the second computer system as the separate shared virtual environment, and a second selectable option selectable to display the third virtual environment on the first computer system without sharing the third virtual environment with the second computer system.

84. In response to detecting that the one or more criteria are met, pursuant to determining that the satisfying of the one or more criteria corresponds to granting a request from the second computer system to share the individual shared virtual environment with the first computer system, displaying the individual shared virtual environment via the display generation component without modifying the system virtual environment of the first computer system; 84. The method of any one of claims 77 to 83, further comprising: displaying the individual shared virtual environment via the display generation component and modifying the system virtual environment of the first computer system to become the individual shared virtual environment in accordance with a determination that the satisfying of the one or more criteria corresponds to a request from the second computer system to switch from displaying the first virtual environment to displaying the individual shared virtual environment that is not based on a request to share the individual shared virtual environment with the first computer system.

85. In response to receiving the second input, 85. The method of any one of claims 82 to 84, further comprising, in accordance with a determination that the first computer system is not in a communication session with another computer system, displaying, via the display generation component, the third virtual environment without displaying the virtual environment sharing user interface.

86. and displaying, via the display generation component, a virtual environment selection user interface while the first computer system and the second computer system are engaged in the communication session; In response to a determination that a first separate virtual environment is being shared by the first computer system and the second computer system during the communication session, the virtual environment selection user interface includes a first visual indication that the first separate virtual environment is being shared by the first computer system and the second computer system during the communication session; 86. The method of any one of claims 77 to 85, wherein, in accordance with a determination that a second individual virtual environment different from the first individual virtual environment is shared by the first computer system and the second computer system during the communication session, the virtual environment selection user interface includes a second visual indication that the second individual virtual environment is shared by the first computer system and the second computer system during the communication session.

87. 87. The method of any one of claims 77 to 86, further comprising displaying, via the display generation component, a virtual environment selection user interface while the first computer system and the second computer system are in the communication session to visually distinguish one or more downloaded environments from one or more environments that have not been downloaded.

88. receiving, while the first computer system and the second computer system are in the communication session and displaying the first virtual environment via the display generation component, an indication that the second computer system has changed from displaying the second virtual environment to displaying the individual shared virtual environment that is different from the first virtual environment; 88. The method of any one of claims 77 to 87, further comprising, in response to receiving the indication that the second computer system has changed from displaying the second virtual environment to displaying the individual shared virtual environment, displaying, via the display generation component, a confirmation user interface for confirming the display of the individual shared virtual environment at the first computer system.

89. the confirmation user interface includes a first selectable option selectable to confirm the display of the individual shared virtual environment and a second selectable option selectable to reject the display of the individual shared virtual environment, the method comprising: receiving, while displaying the confirmation user interface, a second input directed to the confirmation user interface via the one or more input devices; In response to receiving the second input, displaying the individual shared virtual environment via the display generation component in accordance with a determination that the second input corresponds to a selection of the first selectable option; 90. The method of claim 88, further comprising: maintaining, via the display generation component, a display of the first virtual environment without displaying the separate shared virtual environment in accordance with a determination that the third input corresponds to a selection of the second selectable option.

90. 90. The method of claim 88 or 89, wherein the indication that the second computer system has changed from displaying the second virtual environment to displaying the individual shared virtual environment is received after the second computer system is displaying the individual shared virtual environment.

91. 91. The method of any one of claims 77 to 90, wherein the one or more criteria are satisfied based on a respective computer system in the communication session switching from displaying a first respective virtual environment to displaying a second respective virtual environment.

92. 92. The method of any one of claims 77 to 91, wherein the one or more criteria are met based on a respective computer system in the communication session initiating the sharing of respective content in the communication session.

93. The one or more criteria include a criterion that is satisfied when a second input is detected that confirms sharing of the individual shared virtual environment with the first computer system and the second computer system in the communication session, and the method further comprises:

93. The method of claim 92, further comprising terminating the communications session with the second computer system in response to detecting that the one or more criteria have not been met.

94. While the first computer system and the second computer system are engaged in the communication session, while displaying the individual shared virtual environment in response to the second input via the display generation component and while the individual content is being shared during the communication session, receiving an indication via the one or more input devices that the sharing of the individual content in the communication session has ended; 94. The method of claim 92 or 93, further comprising: in response to receiving the indication that the sharing of the individual content in the communication session has ended, ceasing to display the individual shared virtual environment and displaying the first virtual environment via the display generation component.

95. while the separate shared virtual environment is being shared by the first computer system and the second computer system during the communication session; the first computer system displays the individual shared virtual environment from a first orientation relative to a reference within the individual shared virtual environment, wherein displaying includes displaying a distinct portion of the individual shared virtual environment having a distinct location relative to the individual shared virtual environment from the first orientation relative to the reference; 95. The method of any one of claims 77 to 94, wherein the second computer system displays the individual shared virtual environment from a second direction relative to the reference in the individual shared virtual environment that is different from the first direction, and displaying includes displaying the individual portion of the individual shared virtual environment having the individual location relative to the individual shared virtual environment from the second direction relative to the reference.

96. while the separate shared virtual environment is being shared by the first computer system and the second computer system during the communication session; the first computer system displays the individual shared virtual environment from a first orientation relative to a reference in the individual shared virtual environment corresponding to a first simulated location of the first user within the individual shared virtual environment, the spatial representation of the second user being displayed within a display of the individual shared virtual environment from the first orientation; 96. The method of any one of claims 77 to 95, wherein the second computer system displays the individual shared virtual environment from a second direction different from the first direction relative to the reference in the individual shared virtual environment, corresponding to a second simulated location of the second user within the individual shared virtual environment, and the spatial representation of the first user is displayed within the display of the individual shared virtual environment from the second direction.

97. a third virtual environment is being displayed by the first computer system and the second computer system during the communication session, and while the third virtual environment is not being shared by the first computer system and the second computer system during the communication session; the first computer system displays the third virtual environment from a first orientation relative to a reference in the third virtual environment, the spatial representation of the second user being displayed within the display of the third virtual environment from the first orientation; 97. The method of any one of claims 77 to 96, wherein the second computer system displays the third virtual environment from the first direction relative to the reference in the third virtual environment, and the spatial representation of the first user is displayed within the display of the third virtual environment from the first direction.

98. While the first computer system and the second computer system are engaged in the communication session, displaying the first virtual environment before the one or more criteria are met includes displaying the first virtual environment at a first immersion level; 98. The method of any one of claims 77 to 97, wherein displaying the individual shared virtual environment shared by the first computer system and the second computer system during the communication session comprises displaying the individual shared virtual environment at the first immersion level in response to detecting that the one or more criteria are met.

99. In response to detecting that the one or more criteria are met, displaying the individual shared virtual environment shared by the first computer system and the second computer system during the communication session without changing the immersion level associated with the first computer system in accordance with a determination that the immersion level associated with the first computer system exceeds an immersion threshold level; 97. The method of any one of claims 77 to 96, further comprising: displaying the individual shared virtual environment shared by the first computer system and the second computer system during the communication session and modifying the immersion level associated with the first computer system in accordance with a determination that the immersion level associated with the first computer system is below the immersion threshold level.

100. while the first computer system and the second computer system are in the communication session and independent of the immersion level the second computer system is displaying a first separate virtual environment; receiving, while displaying a second individual virtual environment at a first immersion level, a second input via the one or more input devices corresponding to a request to change the immersion level of the second individual virtual environment from the first immersion level to the second immersion level; 99. The method of claim 76, further comprising: in response to receiving the second input, displaying, via the display generation component, the second distinct virtual environment at the second level of immersion.

101. while the first computer system and the second computer system are in the communication session and independent of the volume level of the second computer system; receiving, while the volume level of the first computer system is at a first volume level, a second input via the one or more input devices corresponding to a request to change the volume level of the first computer system from the first volume level to a second volume level different from the first volume level; 101. The method of any one of claims 76 to 100, further comprising: in response to receiving the second input, changing the volume level of the first computer system from the first volume level to the second volume level.

102. While the individual content is being shared during the communication session, displaying, via the display generation component, a personalized virtual environment at a first immersion level while the personalized content is being shared in a compact mode during the communication session; receiving an indication that the personalized content is being shared in an enhanced mode during the communication session while displaying the personalized virtual environment at the first immersion level; In response to receiving the indication that the individual content is being shared in the enhanced mode during the communication session, increasing an immersion level of the individual virtual environment to a second immersion level greater than the first immersion level in accordance with determining that the first immersion level is less than an immersion threshold level; 102. The method of any one of claims 76 to 101, further comprising: maintaining the immersion level of the individual virtual environment at the first immersion level in accordance with a determination that the first immersion level is greater than the immersion threshold level.

103. while the first computer system and the second computer system are engaged in the communication session and displaying a first separate virtual environment at the first computer system; in accordance with determining that the first individual virtual environment is being shared by the first computer system and the second computer system during the communication session, synchronizing a time setting at which the first computer system is displaying the first individual virtual environment with a time setting at which the second computer system is displaying the first individual virtual environment; 103. The method of any one of claims 76 to 102, further comprising: in accordance with a determination that the first individual virtual environment is not shared by the first computer system and the second computer system during the communication session, ceasing to synchronize the time setting at which the first computer system is displaying the first individual virtual environment with the time setting at which the second computer system is displaying a second individual virtual environment.

104. Synchronizing the time setting at which the first computer system is displaying the first individual virtual environment with the time setting at which the second computer system is displaying the first individual virtual environment includes: receiving a second input via the one or more input devices corresponding to a request to change the time setting at the first computer system to a first setting; In response to receiving the second input, initiating a process of setting the time setting on the second computer system to the first setting, the process including causing the second computer system to display the first personalized virtual environment according to the first setting; receiving an indication via the one or more input devices that the time setting at the second computer system has been changed to a second setting; responsive to receiving the indication that the time setting at the second computer system has changed to the second setting, initiating a process to set the time setting at the first computer system to the second setting and displaying the first personalized virtual environment in accordance with the second setting.

105. 105. The method of claim 104, further comprising, in response to receiving the indication that the time setting on the second computer system has been changed to the second setting, generating a notification indicating that the second user has changed the time setting on the second computer system to the second setting.

106. a first computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, said first computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and one or more programs stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions, the instructions displaying a first virtual environment via the display generation component; receiving, via the one or more input devices, a first input by the first user of the first computer system corresponding to a request to join a communications session including a second user of a second computer system different from the first computer system, the second computer system displaying a second virtual environment different from the first virtual environment; a computer system that, in response to receiving the first input, participates in the communication session with the user of the second computer system while maintaining a display of the first virtual environment via the display generation component, wherein the first user of the first computer system is in communication with a spatial representation of the second user located at a separate location within the first virtual environment; the spatial representation of the second user moves within the first virtual environment based on movement of the second user; The second computer system maintains a display of the second virtual environment after the first computer system joins the communication session with the user of the second computer system, the second user of the second computer system communicating with a spatial representation of the first user located within the second virtual environment, and the spatial representation of the first user moving within the second virtual environment based on movement of the first user.

107. 1. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a first computer system in communication with a display generating component and one or more input devices, cause the first computer system to: displaying a first virtual environment via the display generation component; receiving, while displaying the first virtual environment, a first input via the one or more input devices by the first user of the first computer system corresponding to a request to join a communications session including a second user of a second computer system different from the first computer system, the second computer system displaying a second virtual environment different from the first virtual environment; and in response to receiving the first input, joining the communication session with the user of the second computer system while maintaining a display of the first virtual environment via the display generation component, wherein the first user of the first computer system is in communication with a spatial representation of the second user located at a distinct location within the first virtual environment; the spatial representation of the second user moves within the first virtual environment based on movement of the second user; The second computer system maintains a display of the second virtual environment after the first computer system joins the communication session with the user of the second computer system, the second user of the second computer system communicating with a spatial representation of the first user located within the second virtual environment, and the spatial representation of the first user moving within the second virtual environment based on movement of the first user.

108. A first computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and means for displaying a first virtual environment via said display generation component; means for receiving, while displaying the first virtual environment, a first input via the one or more input devices corresponding to a request by the first user of the first computer system to join a communications session including a second user of a second computer system different from the first computer system, the second computer system displaying a second virtual environment different from the first virtual environment; means for, in response to receiving the first input, participating in the communication session with the user of the second computer system while maintaining a display of the first virtual environment via the display generation component, wherein the first user of the first computer system is communicating with a spatial representation of the second user located at a distinct location within the first virtual environment; the spatial representation of the second user moves within the first virtual environment based on movement of the second user; The second computer system maintains a display of the second virtual environment after the first computer system joins the communication session with the user of the second computer system, the second user of the second computer system communicating with a spatial representation of the first user located within the second virtual environment, and the spatial representation of the first user moving within the second virtual environment based on movement of the first user.

109. a first computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, said first computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and and one or more programs stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any one of claims 76 to 105.

110. 106. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a first computer system in communication with a display generating component and one or more input devices, cause the first computer system to perform the method of any one of claims 76 to 105.

111. a first computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, said first computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and and means for executing the method of any one of claims 76 to 105.

112. 1. A method comprising: A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, comprising: detecting a first predetermined event while a viewpoint of a user of the computer system with respect to a three-dimensional environment including a displayed virtual environment, the virtual environment being displayed at a first angle relative to a frame of reference based on a physical environment in which the user is located, is at a first viewpoint; In response to detecting the first predetermined event, updating the display of the virtual environment to display the virtual environment at a second angle relative to the frame of reference that is different from the first angle based on the physical environment in which the user is located in accordance with a determination that the viewpoint of the user satisfies one or more criteria; and maintaining a display of the virtual environment having the first angle relative to the frame of reference based on the physical environment in which the user is located in accordance with a determination that the user's viewpoint does not satisfy the one or more criteria.

113. displaying the virtual environment at the first angle relative to the frame of reference includes displaying, within the three-dimensional environment, a portal to the virtual environment at a first location within the three-dimensional environment; 113. The method of claim 112, wherein displaying the virtual environment at the second angle relative to the frame of reference includes displaying the portal to the virtual environment at a second location within the three-dimensional environment that is different from the first location within the three-dimensional environment.

114. 114. The method of claim 112 or 113, wherein the three-dimensional environment includes a first virtual object that is separate from the virtual environment, and wherein the one or more criteria include a criterion that is satisfied when the first predetermined event includes an input corresponding to moving the first virtual object within the three-dimensional environment.

115. 115. The method of any one of claims 112 to 114, wherein the one or more criteria include a criterion that is met based on a change in orientation of the user of the computer system within the physical environment.

116. 116. The method of claim 115, wherein the change in orientation comprises a change in a body orientation of the user of the computer system.

117. 117. The method of claim 115 or 116, wherein the change in orientation comprises a change in the orientation of the head of the user of the computer system.

118. 118. The method of any one of claims 115 to 117, wherein the change in orientation comprises a change in orientation of a portion of the user of the computer system relative to the three-dimensional environment.

119. 119. The method of claim 118, wherein the criterion is met when the change in orientation of the portion of the user is in a first direction but is not met when the change in orientation of the portion of the user is in a second direction different from the first direction.

120. 120. The method of any one of claims 112 to 119, wherein the one or more criteria include a criterion that is met when the first predetermined event includes an input corresponding to a request to recenter virtual content within the three-dimensional environment to one or more locations within the three-dimensional environment based on the viewpoint of the user.

121. 121. The method of claim 120, wherein the input corresponding to the request to recenter the virtual content comprises a selection of a hardware input element included in the computer system and in communication with the computer system.

122. 122. The method of claim 120 or 121, wherein the input corresponding to the request to recenter the virtual content comprises a selection of a selectable element displayed within the three-dimensional environment.

123. 123. The method of claim 122, wherein the first predetermined event includes the user's viewpoint changing from a first viewpoint to a second viewpoint, the selectable element not being displayed within the three-dimensional environment while the user's viewpoint is at the first viewpoint, and the selectable element being displayed within the three-dimensional environment in response to the user's viewpoint changing to the second viewpoint.

124. When the first predetermined event is detected, the three-dimensional environment includes a first virtual object at a first location outside the virtual environment, and the method further comprises:

124. The method of any one of claims 120 to 123, further comprising, in response to detecting the first predetermined event including the input corresponding to the request to recenter virtual content within the three-dimensional environment, moving the first virtual object from the first location within the three-dimensional environment to a second location different from the first location, wherein the second location is based on the second viewpoint of the user.

125. 113. The method of claim 112, wherein the virtual environment includes a horizon line that is positioned at a distinct location relative to the three-dimensional environment while the virtual environment is displayed at the first angle relative to the frame of reference and while the virtual environment is displayed at the second angle relative to the frame of reference.

126. 125. The method of any one of claims 112 to 124, wherein the virtual environment is displayed at distinct immersion levels while the virtual environment is displayed at the first angle relative to the frame of reference and while the virtual environment is displayed at the second angle relative to the frame of reference.

127. Displaying the virtual environment at the first angle relative to the frame of reference includes displaying, within the three-dimensional environment, a portal to the virtual environment at a first location within the three-dimensional environment, the portal having a first size along a first dimension; 127. The method of any one of claims 112 to 126, wherein displaying the virtual environment at the second angle relative to the frame of reference includes displaying, within the three-dimensional environment, the portal to the virtual environment at the first location within the three-dimensional environment, the portal having a second size along the first dimension that is different from the first size.

128. When the first predetermined event is detected, the virtual environment includes a first virtual object other than the virtual environment that is at a first distance from the viewpoint of the user, and the method further comprises:

128. The method of any one of claims 112 to 127, further comprising: in response to detecting the first predetermined event and in accordance with the determination that the user's viewpoint satisfies the one or more criteria, moving the first virtual object to a second distance from the user's viewpoint that is different from the first distance.

129. 128. The method of claim 127, wherein the second distance is less than the first distance.

130. When the first predetermined event is detected, the first virtual object is located at a predefined location within the virtual environment defined by the virtual environment, and in response to detecting the first predefined event and in accordance with the determination that the viewpoint of the user satisfies the one or more criteria, the first virtual object is displayed at a first location within the three-dimensional environment that is different from the predefined location, the method comprising: receiving, while displaying the first virtual object at the first location, input via the one or more input devices corresponding to a request to move the first virtual object away from the first location within the three-dimensional environment; 129. The method of claim 127 or 128, further comprising: in response to receiving the input, moving the first virtual object away from the first location in the three-dimensional environment in accordance with the input.

131. When the first predetermined event is detected, the virtual environment includes a first virtual object other than the virtual environment that is at a first location within the three-dimensional environment and has a first spatial relationship to the viewpoint of the user, and the method further comprises: in response to detecting the first predetermined event and in accordance with the determination that the viewpoint of the user satisfies the one or more criteria; in accordance with a determination that the first virtual object has a first value for a respective characteristic, moving the first virtual object to a second location within the three-dimensional environment that is different from the first location, the first virtual object having the first spatial relationship to the viewpoint of the user after the first predetermined event is detected while the first virtual object is located at the second location; 131. The method of any one of claims 112 to 130, further comprising: maintaining the first virtual object at the first location within the three-dimensional environment in accordance with a determination that the first virtual object has a second value for a respective characteristic that is different from the first value, wherein while located at the first location, the first virtual object has a second spatial relationship with respect to the viewpoint of the user after the first predetermined event is detected that is different from the first spatial relationship.

132. detecting a second predetermined event while displaying the virtual environment at the second angle relative to the frame of reference; In response to detecting the second predetermined event, 132. The method of any one of claims 112 to 131, further comprising: updating the display of the virtual environment to display the virtual environment from a third angle relative to the frame of reference that is different from the second angle in accordance with a determination that the user's viewpoint satisfies the one or more criteria.

133. the first predetermined event includes the user's viewpoint changing from a first viewpoint to a second viewpoint, and updating the display of the virtual environment to display the virtual environment from the third angle includes:

133. The method of claim 132, comprising displaying the virtual environment from the first angle in accordance with a determination that the second predetermined event comprises the user's viewpoint changing from the second viewpoint to the first viewpoint.

134. the first predetermined event includes the user's viewpoint changing from a first viewpoint to a second viewpoint, and updating the display of the virtual environment to display the virtual environment from the third angle includes:

134. The method of claim 132 or 133, comprising displaying the virtual environment from the third angle different from the first angle in accordance with a determination that the second predetermined event includes the user's viewpoint changing from the second viewpoint to a third viewpoint different from the first viewpoint.

135. when the first predetermined event is detected, the three-dimensional environment includes a first virtual object positioned at a predetermined location within the virtual environment defined by the virtual environment; the first predetermined event includes the user's viewpoint changing from a first viewpoint to a second viewpoint; In response to detecting the first predetermined event and in accordance with the determination that the viewpoint of the user satisfies the one or more criteria, the first virtual object is displayed at a first location within the three-dimensional environment that is different from the default location; Updating the display of the virtual environment to display the virtual environment from the third angle includes:

135. The method of any one of claims 132 to 134, comprising, in accordance with a determination that the second predetermined event comprises the user's viewpoint changing from the second viewpoint to the first viewpoint, moving the first virtual object to the predetermined location within the virtual environment defined by the virtual environment.

136. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and one or more programs stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions, the instructions detecting a first predetermined event while a viewpoint of a user of the computer system with respect to a three-dimensional environment including a displayed virtual environment, the virtual environment being displayed at a first angle relative to a frame of reference based on a physical environment in which the user is located, is at a first viewpoint; In response to detecting the first predetermined event, updating the display of the virtual environment to display the virtual environment at a second angle relative to the frame of reference that is different from the first angle based on the physical environment in which the user is located in accordance with a determination that the viewpoint of the user satisfies one or more criteria; and maintaining a representation of the virtual environment having the first angle relative to the frame of reference based on the physical environment in which the user is located according to a determination that the viewpoint of the user does not satisfy the one or more criteria.

137. 1. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generating component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to: detecting a first predetermined event while a viewpoint of a user of the computer system with respect to a three-dimensional environment including a displayed virtual environment, the virtual environment being displayed at a first angle relative to a frame of reference based on a physical environment in which the user is located, is at a first viewpoint; In response to detecting the first predetermined event, updating the display of the virtual environment to display the virtual environment at a second angle relative to the frame of reference that is different from the first angle based on the physical environment in which the user is located in accordance with a determination that the viewpoint of the user satisfies one or more criteria; and maintaining a representation of the virtual environment having the first angle relative to the frame of reference based on the physical environment in which the user is located in accordance with a determination that the user's viewpoint does not satisfy the one or more criteria.

138. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and means for detecting a first predetermined event while a viewpoint of a user of the computer system with respect to a three-dimensional environment including a displayed virtual environment, the virtual environment being displayed at a first angle relative to a frame of reference based on a physical environment in which the user is located; and In response to detecting the first predetermined event, updating the display of the virtual environment to display the virtual environment at a second angle relative to the frame of reference that is different from the first angle based on the physical environment in which the user is located in accordance with a determination that the viewpoint of the user satisfies one or more criteria; means for maintaining a display of the virtual environment having the first angle relative to the frame of reference based on the physical environment in which the user is located according to a determination that the user's viewpoint does not satisfy the one or more criteria.

139. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and and one or more programs stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any one of claims 112 to 135.

140. 136. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generating component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to perform the method of any one of claims 112 to 135.

141. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and and means for performing the method of any one of claims 112 to 135.

142. 1. A method comprising: A first computer system having a display generation component and one or more input devices, displaying, via the display generation component, a first virtual environment during a communication session, the communication session including the first computer system and a second computer system different from the first computer system, the first virtual environment being a first simulated physical environment in which a conversation between a first user of the first computer system and a second user of the second computer system is taking place during the communication session; while displaying the first virtual environment during the communication session, receiving, via the one or more input devices, a first input corresponding to a request to display a second virtual environment, the second virtual environment being different from the first virtual environment, while remaining in the communication session; In response to receiving the first input, displaying, via the display generation component, while remaining in the communication session, the second virtual environment, the second virtual environment being a second simulated physical environment in which a conversation between the first user of the first computer system and the second user of the second computer system is taking place during the communication session; and initiating, in the second computer system, a process for displaying the second virtual environment in accordance with a determination that one or more first criteria are met, wherein the second virtual environment is the second simulated physical environment in which the conversation between the first user of the first computer system and the second user of the second computer system is taking place during the communication session.

143. In response to receiving the first input, 143. The method of claim 142, comprising discontinuing initiation of the process of displaying the second virtual environment at the second computer system while the first computer system and the second computer system remain in the communication session in accordance with a determination that the one or more first criteria are not met.

144. 144. The method of claim 142 or 143, wherein the one or more first criteria include a criterion that is satisfied when the first computer system receives input corresponding to permission to share the second virtual environment with the second computer system.

145. Displaying the second virtual environment during the communication session in response to receiving the first input includes displaying the second simulated physical environment from a default orientation via the display generation component, and displaying the first virtual environment during the communication session includes: displaying, via the display generation component, the first simulated physical environment from a second orientation different from the default orientation in accordance with a determination that the first computer system joined the communication session while the first virtual environment was already being shared during the communication session; and displaying the first simulated physical environment from the default orientation via the display generation component in accordance with a determination that the first computer system has begun displaying the first virtual environment during the communication session.

146. 146. The method of claim 145, wherein the second orientation is based on one or more orientations within the first virtual environment associated with one or more other computer systems already displaying the first virtual environment during the communication session.

147. Displaying the first virtual environment during the communication session comprises: displaying the first simulated physical environment from a third orientation via the display generation component in accordance with a determination that a first number of one or more other computer systems are already displaying the first virtual environment during the communication session; and and displaying, via the display generation component, the first simulated physical environment from a fourth orientation different from the third orientation in accordance with a determination that a second number of one or more other computer systems different from the first number of one or more other computer systems are already displaying the first virtual environment during the communication session.

148. Displaying the first simulated physical environment from the second orientation via the display generation component is pursuant to determining that the shared activity in the communication session is a first shared activity, and the method further comprises: detecting, via the display generation component, an indication that the shared activity has changed from a first shared activity to a second shared activity while displaying the first simulated physical environment from the second orientation; 147. The method of claim 145 or 146, further comprising: in response to detecting that the shared activity has changed from the first shared activity to the second shared activity, displaying, via the display generation component, the first simulated physical environment from a third orientation in accordance with the second shared activity.

149. 149. The method of claim 148, wherein, in accordance with a determination that the second shared activity corresponds to a shared visual experience, orientations associated with multiple computer systems included in the communication session, including the third orientation, relative to the first simulated physical environment are within a range of orientations that are the same orientation.

150. A method according to claim 148 or 149, wherein, in accordance with a determination that the second shared activity does not correspond to a shared visual experience, orientations associated with multiple computer systems included in the communication session, including the third orientation, with respect to the first simulated physical environment differ from each other by at least a threshold amount.

151. 151. The method of any one of claims 142 to 150, wherein a first level of immersion at which the first virtual environment or the second virtual environment is displayed on the first computer system is independent of a second level of immersion at which a respective virtual environment is displayed on the second computer system during the communication session.

152. 152. The method of any one of claims 142 to 151, further comprising, in response to detecting an indication that a personal virtual environment shared during the communication session has changed, displaying, via the display generation component, a notification indicating the change in the personal virtual environment shared during the communication session.

153. 153. The method of claim 152, wherein the notification indicates a particular user associated with the communication session who initiated the change in the particular virtual environment shared during the communication session.

154. 154. The method of claim 152 or 153, further comprising initiating a process to download the first shared virtual environment to the first computer system in response to detecting the indication that the individual virtual environment shared during the communication session has been changed to a first shared virtual environment and in accordance with a determination that one or more criteria are met, including criteria that are met when the first shared virtual environment has not been downloaded to the first computer system.

155. 155. The method of any one of claims 142 to 154, wherein displaying the second virtual environment during the communication session includes displaying the second simulated physical environment from a first simulated location relative to the second simulated physical environment via the display generation component, and wherein the second computer system displays the individual virtual environment from the first simulated location relative to the individual simulated physical environment of the individual virtual environment during the communication session.

156. displaying the second virtual environment during the communication session includes displaying a representation of the second user of the computer system at a distinct location within the second virtual environment, the distinct location within the second virtual environment being different from the first simulated location for the distinct simulated physical environment; 156. The method of claim 155, wherein a representation of the first user of the first computer system is displayed by the second computer system at a separate location within the separate virtual environment, the separate location within the separate virtual environment being different from the first simulated location for the second simulated physical environment.

157. Initiating the process of displaying the second virtual environment on the second computer system includes: initiating, at the second computer system, the process of displaying the second virtual environment in the second simulated physical environment with the first visual appearance corresponding to the first time in accordance with a determination that the second virtual environment is displayed in the first computer system with the first visual appearance corresponding to the first time in the second simulated physical environment; and initiating the process of displaying the second virtual environment at the second computer system in the second simulated physical environment with the second visual appearance corresponding to the second time in accordance with a determination that the second virtual environment is displayed at the first computer system in the second simulated physical environment with the second visual appearance corresponding to the second time, the second visual appearance corresponding to the second time, the second visual appearance corresponding to the second time in accordance with a determination that the second virtual environment is displayed at the first computer system in the second simulated physical environment with ...

158. receiving, during the communication session, while displaying the second virtual environment in the second simulated physical environment with the first visual appearance corresponding to the first time via the display generation component, a second input corresponding to a request to display the second virtual environment in the second simulated physical environment with the second visual appearance corresponding to the second time while remaining in the communication session via the one or more input devices; In response to receiving the second input, displaying the second virtual environment with the second visual appearance corresponding to the second time in the second simulated physical environment while remaining in the communication session; 158. The method of claim 157, further comprising: initiating, in the second computer system, a process for displaying the second virtual environment with the second visual appearance corresponding to the second time within the second simulated physical environment in accordance with a determination that one or more second criteria are met.

159. 159. The method of any one of claims 142 to 158, wherein the first input corresponding to the request to display the second virtual environment comprises an input directed to a first virtual environment selection user interface displayed as part of a communication session control interface for controlling one or more aspects of the communication session.

160. 160. The method of any one of claims 142 to 159, wherein the first input corresponding to the request to display the second virtual environment includes an input directed to a first virtual environment selection user interface displayed as part of a home user interface of the first computer system for accessing one or more functions of the first computer system other than the communication session.

161. the first virtual environment selection user interface includes a first selectable object selectable to display the first virtual environment during the communication session and a second selectable object selectable to display the second virtual environment during the communication session, and displaying the first virtual environment selection user interface includes: displaying, via the display generation component, the first selectable object along with a visual indication of a current selection in the first virtual environment in accordance with determining that the first virtual environment is currently being displayed during the communication session; and displaying, via the display generation component, the second selectable object along with the visual indication of a current selection in the second virtual environment in accordance with a determination that the second virtual environment is currently being displayed during the communication session.

162. Displaying the visual indication of a current selection of the second virtual environment includes: displaying the visual indication in a first visual appearance in accordance with a determination that the one or more first criteria are satisfied, the first criteria including criteria that are satisfied when the first virtual environment is a shared virtual environment; and displaying the visual indication in a second visual appearance different from the first visual appearance in accordance with a determination that the one or more first criteria are not satisfied.

163. 163. The method of any one of claims 159 to 162, wherein the first virtual environment selection user interface is displayed as an overlay on a representation of the second user within the first virtual environment during the communication session.

164. before the first computer system is part of the communication session and before displaying the first virtual environment during the communication session; receiving a second input via the one or more input devices corresponding to a request to join the communication session; In response to receiving the second input, pursuant to determining that the first virtual environment is being shared during the communication session, joining the communication session and displaying the first virtual environment via the display generation component; 164. The method of any one of claims 142 to 163, further comprising: in accordance with a determination that the first virtual environment is not being shared during the communication session, joining the communication session without displaying the first virtual environment via the display generation component.

165. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and one or more programs stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions, the instructions displaying, via the display generation component, during a communication session including the first computer system and a second computer system different from the first computer system, a first virtual environment, the first virtual environment being a first simulated physical environment in which a conversation between a first user of the first computer system and a second user of the second computer system is taking place during the communication session; while displaying the first virtual environment during the communication session, receiving, via the one or more input devices, a first input corresponding to a request to display a second virtual environment, the second virtual environment being different from the first virtual environment, while remaining in the communication session; In response to receiving the first input, displaying, via the display generation component, while remaining in the communication session, the second virtual environment, the second virtual environment being a second simulated physical environment in which a conversation between the first user of the first computer system and the second user of the second computer system is taking place during the communication session; In accordance with a determination that one or more first criteria are met, the computer system initiates a process at the second computer system to display the second virtual environment, the second virtual environment being the second simulated physical environment in which the conversation between the first user of the first computer system and the second user of the second computer system is taking place during the communication session.

166. 1. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generating component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to: displaying, via the display generation component, a first virtual environment during a communication session, the communication session including the first computer system and a second computer system different from the first computer system, the first virtual environment being a first simulated physical environment in which a conversation between a first user of the first computer system and a second user of the second computer system is taking place during the communication session; while displaying the first virtual environment during the communication session, receiving, via the one or more input devices, a first input corresponding to a request to display a second virtual environment, the second virtual environment being different from the first virtual environment, while remaining in the communication session; In response to receiving the first input, displaying, via the display generation component, while remaining in the communication session, the second virtual environment, the second virtual environment being a second simulated physical environment in which a conversation between the first user of the first computer system and the second user of the second computer system is taking place during the communication session; and initiating, in accordance with a determination that one or more first criteria are met, at the second computer system a process for displaying the second virtual environment, the second virtual environment being the second simulated physical environment in which the conversation between the first user of the first computer system and the second user of the second computer system is taking place during the communication session.

167. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and means for displaying, via the display generation component, during a communication session including the first computer system and a second computer system different from the first computer system, a first virtual environment, the first virtual environment being a first simulated physical environment in which a conversation between a first user of the first computer system and a second user of the second computer system is taking place during the communication session; means for receiving, while displaying the first virtual environment during the communication session, via the one or more input devices, a first input corresponding to a request to display a second virtual environment, different from the first virtual environment, while remaining in the communication session; In response to receiving the first input, displaying, via the display generation component, while remaining in the communication session, the second virtual environment, the second virtual environment being a second simulated physical environment in which a conversation between the first user of the first computer system and the second user of the second computer system is taking place during the communication session; and means for initiating, in the second computer system, a process for displaying the second virtual environment in accordance with a determination that one or more first criteria are met, wherein the second virtual environment is the second simulated physical environment in which the conversation between the first user of the first computer system and the second user of the second computer system is taking place during the communication session.

168. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and and one or more programs stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any one of claims 142 to 164.

169. 165. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generating component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to perform the method of any one of claims 142 to 164.

170. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and and means for executing the method of any one of claims 142 to 164.

171. 1. A method comprising: A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, comprising: receiving a request via the one or more input devices to display the respective media within a virtual three-dimensional environment; and in response to the request to display the respective media within the virtual three-dimensional environment, simultaneously displaying the respective media within the virtual three-dimensional environment with simulated lighting effects based on content of the respective media and one or more textures of one or more portions of the virtual three-dimensional environment, wherein displaying the simulated lighting effects comprises: In response to determining that the respective medium is a first medium, displaying a first portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment with an appearance based on the appearance of the first media content and a texture of the first portion; displaying a second portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment with an appearance based on the appearance of the content of the first media and a texture of the second portion; displaying a third portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment between the first portion and the second portion with an appearance independent of the content of the first media; In response to determining that the respective media is a second media different from the first media, displaying the first portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment with an appearance based on the appearance of the second media content and the texture of the first portion; displaying the second portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment with an appearance based on the appearance of the content of the second media and the texture of the second portion; and displaying the third portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment between the first portion and the second portion with an appearance independent of the content of the second media.

172. 172. The method of claim 171, wherein the request to display the respective media within the virtual three-dimensional environment is received while the respective media is not being displayed.

173. The request to display the respective media within the virtual three-dimensional environment is received while displaying the respective media within a second environment different from the virtual three-dimensional environment, and the method further comprises: in response to receiving the request to display the respective media within the virtual three-dimensional environment; ceasing the display of the second environment; and 172. The method of claim 171, further comprising: displaying the respective media within the virtual three-dimensional environment via the display generation component.

174. modifying one or more visual characteristics of the content of the respective media while displaying the respective media within the virtual three-dimensional environment; in response to modifying the one or more visual characteristics of the content of the respective media; modifying the appearance of the first portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment based on the modification of the one or more visual characteristics of the content of the respective media; modifying the appearance of the second portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment based on the modification of the one or more visual characteristics of the content of the respective media; 174. The method of any one of claims 171 to 173, further comprising: maintaining the appearance of the third portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment.

175. 175. The method of any one of claims 171 to 174, wherein the texture of the first portion and the texture of the second portion share one or more visual characteristics.

176. displaying the simulated lighting effect displaying the first portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment with a smooth surface including the texture of the first portion; and displaying the second portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment with a smooth surface that includes the texture of the second portion.

177. 177. The method of any one of claims 171 to 176, wherein the texture of the first portion and the texture of the second portion include a plurality of virtual features of small relative size, the virtual features having height dimensions relative to the virtual three-dimensional environment that are within a threshold amount of each other.

178. 178. The method of any one of claims 171 to 177, wherein the texture of the first portion and the texture of the second portion include a plurality of virtual features extending in a direction within a threshold angle parallel to a first dimension of the respective media.

179. in response to the request to display the respective media within the virtual three-dimensional environment, in response to a determination that the respective media is the first media, the first media having a first aspect ratio relative to a first axis and a second axis within the virtual three-dimensional environment; displaying the first media within the virtual three-dimensional environment using a first dimension of a first value along the first axis and a second dimension of a second value along the second axis, the first value and the second value corresponding to the first aspect ratio; receiving a request via the one or more input devices to modify the display of the respective media within the virtual three-dimensional environment; in response to the request to change the representation of the respective media within the virtual three dimensional environment, in response to a determination that the request is to change the representation of the respective media within the virtual three dimensional environment from the first media to a second media different from the first media, the second media having a second aspect ratio relative to the first axis and the second axis within the three dimensional environment different from the first aspect ratio; 179. The method of any one of claims 171 to 178, further comprising displaying the second media within the virtual three-dimensional environment using a first dimension along the first axis of the first value and a second dimension along the second axis of a third value different from the second value, wherein the first value and the third value correspond to the second aspect ratio.

180. receiving, via the one or more input devices, an input corresponding to a selection of a second one of the plurality of available viewpoints associated with the virtual three-dimensional environment while displaying the respective media in the virtual three-dimensional environment at a first location within the virtual three-dimensional environment from a first viewpoint of a plurality of available viewpoints associated with the virtual three-dimensional environment, the first viewpoint having a first spatial orientation with respect to the respective media within the virtual three-dimensional environment; 179. The method of any one of claims 171 to 179, further comprising: in response to receiving the input, displaying the respective media at the first location within the virtual three-dimensional environment from the second viewpoint of the plurality of available viewpoints, the second viewpoint having a second spatial arrangement relative to the respective media within the virtual three-dimensional environment that is different from the first spatial arrangement.

181. 181. The method of claim 180, wherein the second viewpoint differs from the first viewpoint in distance from the respective media within the virtual three-dimensional environment and in height relative to the portion of the respective media within the virtual three-dimensional environment.

182. 182. The method of claim 181, wherein the second viewpoint differs from the first viewpoint in height relative to the respective media within the virtual three-dimensional environment.

183. detecting, while displaying the respective media within the virtual three-dimensional environment, a change in a current viewpoint of a user of the computer system relative to the virtual three-dimensional environment from a first viewpoint directed toward the respective media to a second viewpoint not directed toward the respective media; 183. The method of claim 181 or 182, further comprising: in response to detecting the change in the user's current viewpoint, ceasing the display of the respective media and displaying a fourth portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment with an appearance independent of the simulated lighting effects that do not include the texture of the first portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment and the texture of the second portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment.

184. 184. The method of claim 183, wherein displaying the fourth portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment includes displaying a representation of a horizon line within the fourth portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment.

185. 185. The method of any one of claims 170 to 184, further comprising, in response to the request to display the respective media within the virtual three-dimensional environment, ceasing the display of the respective media within the virtual three-dimensional environment in accordance with a determination that the respective media is a third media different from the first media and the second media.

186. 186. The method of any one of claims 170 to 185, wherein the third portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment comprises simulated empty space and does not include any virtual surfaces.

187. 187. The method of any one of claims 170 to 186, wherein displaying the respective media within the virtual three-dimensional environment includes displaying the respective media without visual distinction between the respective media and the third portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment.

188. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and one or more programs stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions, the instructions receiving a request via the one or more input devices to display the respective media within the virtual three-dimensional environment; a computer system, in response to the request to display the respective media within the virtual three-dimensional environment, simultaneously displaying the respective media within the virtual three-dimensional environment with simulated lighting effects based on content of the respective media and one or more textures of one or more portions of the virtual three-dimensional environment, the displaying of the simulated lighting effects comprising: In response to determining that the respective medium is a first medium, displaying the first portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment with an appearance based on the appearance of the first media content and the texture of the first portion; displaying a second portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment with an appearance based on the appearance of the content of the first media and a texture of the second portion; displaying a third portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment between the first portion and the second portion with an appearance independent of the content of the first media; In response to determining that the respective media is a second media different from the first media, displaying the first portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment with an appearance based on the appearance of the second media content and the texture of the first portion; displaying the second portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment with an appearance based on the appearance of the content of the second media and the texture of the second portion; and displaying the third portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment between the first portion and the second portion with an appearance independent of the content of the second media.

189. 1. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generating component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to: receiving a request via the one or more input devices to display the respective media within a virtual three-dimensional environment; and in response to the request to display the respective media within the virtual three-dimensional environment, displaying the respective media within the virtual three-dimensional environment simultaneously with simulated lighting effects based on content of the respective media and one or more textures of one or more portions of the virtual three-dimensional environment, wherein displaying the simulated lighting effects comprises: pursuant to determining that the respective media is a first media, displaying a first portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment with an appearance based on the appearance of the content of the first media and a texture of the first portion; displaying a second portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment with an appearance based on the appearance of the content of the first media and a texture of the second portion; displaying a third portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment between the first portion and the second portion with an appearance independent of the content of the first media; In response to determining that the respective media is a second media different from the first media, displaying the first portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment with an appearance based on the appearance of the second media content and the texture of the first portion; displaying the second portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment with an appearance based on the appearance of the content of the second media and the texture of the second portion; and displaying the third portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment, the third portion being between the first portion and the second portion, with an appearance independent of the content of the second media.

190. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and means for receiving, via said one or more input devices, a request to display the respective media within the virtual three-dimensional environment; means, in response to the request to display the respective media within the virtual three-dimensional environment, simultaneously displaying the respective media within the virtual three-dimensional environment with simulated lighting effects based on content of the respective media and one or more textures of one or more portions of the virtual three-dimensional environment, wherein displaying the simulated lighting effects comprises: In response to determining that the respective medium is a first medium, displaying a first portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment with an appearance based on the appearance of the first media content and a texture of the first portion; displaying a second portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment with an appearance based on the appearance of the content of the first media and a texture of the second portion; displaying a third portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment between the first portion and the second portion with an appearance independent of the content of the first media; In response to determining that the respective media is a second media different from the first media, displaying the first portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment with an appearance based on the appearance of the second media content and the texture of the first portion; displaying the second portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment with an appearance based on the appearance of the content of the second media and the texture of the second portion; and displaying the third portion of the virtual three-dimensional environment between the first portion and the second portion with an appearance independent of the content of the second media.

191. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and and one or more programs stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any one of claims 170 to 187.

192. 188. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generating component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to perform the method of any one of claims 170 to 187.

193. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and and means for performing the method of any one of claims 170 to 187.

194. 1. A method comprising: A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, comprising: displaying, via the display generation component, media at a first location within the virtual environment from a current viewpoint of a user of the computer system, the current viewpoint of the user being a first viewpoint of a plurality of available viewpoints associated with the virtual environment, the first viewpoint having a first spatial orientation with respect to the media within the virtual environment; While displaying the media from the first viewpoint of the plurality of available viewpoints, receiving, via the one or more input devices, a first input corresponding to a selection of a second viewpoint within the three-dimensional environment, the second viewpoint having a second spatial orientation relative to the media within the virtual environment; and displaying the media at the first location within the virtual environment from the second viewpoint of the plurality of available viewpoints via the display generation component in response to receiving the first input.

195. 200. The method of claim 194, wherein the first viewpoint comprises a first distance from the media relative to the virtual environment, and the second viewpoint comprises a second distance from the media relative to the virtual environment that is different from the first distance.

196. 196. The method of claim 194 or 195, wherein the first viewpoint comprises a first viewing angle for the media in the virtual environment, and the second viewpoint comprises a second viewing angle for the media in the virtual environment that is different from the first viewing angle.

197. 200. The method of claim 196, wherein the second viewing angle for the media is from a location in the virtual environment below a vector normal to a surface of the media.

198. 200. The method of claim 196, wherein the second viewing angle for the media is from a location within the virtual environment that is contained within a vector perpendicular to a surface of the media.

199. 200. The method of claim 196, wherein the second viewing angle for the media is from a location in the virtual environment above a vector normal to a surface of the media.

200. 200. The method of any one of claims 194 to 199, wherein the first viewpoint comprises a first distance from the media relative to the virtual environment and a first viewing angle relative to the media, and the second viewpoint comprises a second distance from the media relative to the virtual environment that is different from the first distance and a second viewing angle relative to the media that is different from the first viewing angle.

201. 201. A method according to any one of claims 194 to 200, wherein displaying the media at the first location within the virtual environment from the second perspective in response to receiving the first input comprises maintaining the display of the media at the first location within the virtual environment while changing the user's current perspective from the first perspective to the second perspective.

202. Displaying the media at the first location within the virtual environment includes displaying the media simultaneously with simulated lighting effects based on content of the media and one or more textures of one or more portions of the virtual environment, and displaying the simulated lighting effects includes: displaying a first portion of the virtual environment with an appearance based on the appearance of the media content and a texture of the first portion; displaying a second portion of the virtual environment with an appearance based on the appearance of the media content and a texture of the second portion; and displaying a third portion of the virtual environment between the first and second portions with an appearance independent of the content of the media.

203. While displaying the media at the first location within the virtual environment from the second perspective, receiving a second input via the one or more input devices corresponding to a request to display the media in a second environment different from the virtual environment; 203. The method of any one of claims 194 to 202, further comprising: in response to receiving the second input, ceasing to display the media at the first location within the virtual environment and displaying the media in the second environment.

204. 204. The method of any one of claims 194 to 203, wherein the second input comprises selecting a selectable option displayed in a content control user interface displayed in the virtual environment to display the second environment, the content control user interface further comprising one or more selectable options for controlling playback of the media.

205. 205. The method of claim 204, further comprising, in response to receiving the second input, displaying, via the display generation component, an environment selection user interface, the environment selection user interface including one or more visual representations of one or more environments available for display, including a selectable visual representation selectable for displaying the second environment.

206. Displaying the environment selection user interface includes: A method according to claim 204 or 205, comprising, while displaying the media at the first location within a particular virtual environment from a particular viewpoint, displaying, in accordance with a determination that the particular virtual environment is the virtual environment, a plurality of selectable options selectable for beginning to display the media from the plurality of available viewpoints associated with the virtual environment.

207. 207. The method of claim 206, wherein the plurality of selectable options are selectable to change the spatial distance of the individual viewpoints from the media.

208. 208. The method of claim 206 or 207, wherein the plurality of selectable options are selectable to change the viewing angle of the individual viewpoints relative to the media.

209. Displaying the environment selection user interface includes:

209. A method according to any one of claims 206 to 208, comprising, in accordance with a determination that the individual virtual environment is different from the virtual environment, displaying the environment selection user interface without displaying the plurality of selectable options selectable for beginning to display the media from the plurality of different viewpoints within the individual virtual environment.

210. 210. The method of any one of claims 206 to 209, wherein the environment selection user interface includes a selectable option that is selectable to cease displaying the media in the virtual environment.

211. Displaying the content control user interface within the virtual environment comprises: displaying the content control user interface having one or more visual indications representing the current environment in which the media is being displayed and the user's current viewpoint of the plurality of available viewpoints within the virtual environment in accordance with a determination that the current environment in which the media is being displayed is the virtual environment; A method according to any one of claims 204 to 210, comprising: displaying the content control user interface having one or more visual indications representing the current environment in which the media is being displayed, without displaying an indication of the user's current viewpoint within the second environment, in accordance with a determination that the current environment in which the media is being displayed is the second environment that is different from the virtual environment.

212. 212. The method of any one of claims 194 to 211, wherein displaying the media at the first location within the virtual environment from the second perspective in response to receiving the first input comprises displaying an animated transition from displaying the media at the first location within the virtual environment from the first perspective to displaying the media at the first location within the virtual environment from the second perspective, the animated transition comprising gradually changing the current perspective from the first perspective to the second perspective.

213. 213. The method of claim 212, wherein gradually changing the current viewpoint from the first viewpoint to the second viewpoint comprises non-linearly changing the current viewpoint from the first viewpoint to the second viewpoint.

214. 214. The method of any one of claims 194 to 213, wherein displaying the media at the first location within the virtual environment from the second perspective in response to receiving the first input includes maintaining playback of the media within the virtual environment while simultaneously changing the user's current perspective from the first perspective to the second perspective.

215. 215. The method of any one of claims 194 to 214, wherein displaying the media at the first location within the virtual environment from the second perspective in response to receiving the first input includes maintaining a display of the virtual environment while simultaneously changing the user's current perspective from the first perspective to the second perspective.

216. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and one or more programs stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions, the instructions via the display generation component, displaying media at a first location within the virtual environment from a current viewpoint of a user of the computer system, the current viewpoint of the user being a first viewpoint of a plurality of available viewpoints associated with the virtual environment, the first viewpoint having a first spatial orientation with respect to the media within the virtual environment; while displaying the media from the first viewpoint of the plurality of available viewpoints, receiving, via the one or more input devices, a first input corresponding to a selection of a second viewpoint within the three-dimensional environment, the second viewpoint having a second spatial orientation relative to the media within the virtual environment; and displaying the media at the first location within the virtual environment from the second viewpoint of the plurality of available viewpoints via the display generation component in response to receiving the first input.

217. 1. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generating component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to: displaying, via the display generation component, media at a first location within the virtual environment from a current viewpoint of a user of the computer system, the current viewpoint of the user being a first viewpoint of a plurality of available viewpoints associated with the virtual environment, the first viewpoint having a first spatial orientation with respect to the media within the virtual environment; While displaying the media from the first viewpoint of the plurality of available viewpoints, receiving, via the one or more input devices, a first input corresponding to a selection of a second viewpoint within the three-dimensional environment, the second viewpoint having a second spatial orientation relative to the media within the virtual environment; and in response to receiving the first input, displaying the media at the first location within the virtual environment from the second perspective of the plurality of available perspectives via the display generation component.

218. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and means for displaying, via the display generation component, media at a first location within the virtual environment from a current viewpoint of a user of the computer system, the current viewpoint of the user being a first viewpoint of a plurality of available viewpoints associated with the virtual environment, the first viewpoint having a first spatial orientation with respect to the media within the virtual environment; means for receiving, while displaying the media from the first viewpoint of the plurality of available viewpoints, via the one or more input devices, a first input corresponding to selection of a second viewpoint within the three-dimensional environment, the second viewpoint having a second spatial orientation relative to the media within the virtual environment; means for displaying the media at the first location within the virtual environment from the second viewpoint of the plurality of available viewpoints via the display generation component in response to receiving the first input.

219. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and and one or more programs stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any one of claims 194 to 215.

220. 216. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generating component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to perform the method of any one of claims 194 to 215.

221. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and and means for performing the method of any one of claims 194 to 215.

222. the view of the three-dimensional environment visible through the display generation component when the first user input is received is a first view corresponding to a first viewpoint of the user and includes a first portion of the three-dimensional environment distinct from the respective media content visible through the display generation component at a first location within the first view, the method comprising: In response to receiving the first user input, reducing the visual salience of the first portion of the three-dimensional environment that is visible through the display generation component at the first location within the first view; after reducing the visual salience of the first portion of the three-dimensional environment visible via the display generation component at the first location within the first view, presenting via the display generation component a second portion of the three-dimensional environment at the first location within a second view of the three-dimensional environment corresponding to a second viewpoint of the user that is different from the first viewpoint, the second portion being different from the first portion and different from the respective media content; 70. The method of any one of claims 55 to 69, wherein the first location in the second view of the three-dimensional environment is the same as the first location in the first view of the three-dimensional environment.

223. 1. A method comprising: A first computer system in communication with one or more input devices and display generation components, Detecting a first event via the one or more input devices while a first three-dimensional environment is viewable via the display generation component; In response to detecting the first event, In response to a determination that the first event satisfies one or more first criteria, the first criteria being met if the first event includes an initiation of a first communication session between a user of the first computer system and a participant of the first communication session different from the user, and a second criterion being met if the first communication session is associated with a second three-dimensional environment different from the first three-dimensional environment; ceasing visibility of the first three-dimensional environment via the display generation component; and initiating, via the display generation component, a process for displaying the second three dimensional environment, wherein as the user's viewpoint changes, an appearance of portions of the second three dimensional environment that are visible to the user changes to the user; maintaining visibility of the first three-dimensional environment via the display generation component in accordance with a determination that the first event does not satisfy the one or more first criteria.

224. 224. The method of claim 223, wherein initiating the process of displaying the second three-dimensional environment includes sharing the second three-dimensional environment with the participants and displaying a visual representation of the participants within the second three-dimensional environment via the display generation component.

225. 225. The method of claim 223 or 224, wherein the second three-dimensional environment is displayed in conjunction with the initiation of the first communication.

226. detecting, via the one or more input devices, a second event different from the first event while the first three-dimensional environment is visible via the display generation component; In response to detecting the second event, in response to determining that the second event satisfies one or more second criteria different from the one or more first criteria, including a criterion that is satisfied when the second event includes detecting an indication that a second participant has joined the first communication session; ceasing visibility of the first three-dimensional environment via the display generation component; and initiating, via the display generation component, a process for displaying a third three dimensional environment different from the first three dimensional environment, wherein as the viewpoint of the user changes, an appearance of portions of the third three dimensional environment visible to the user changes to the user; 226. The method of any one of claims 223 to 225, further comprising: maintaining visibility of the first three-dimensional environment via the display generation component in accordance with a determination that the second event does not satisfy the one or more second criteria.

227. detecting, via the one or more input devices, a second event different from the first event while the first three-dimensional environment is visible via the display generation component; 227. The method of any one of claims 223 to 226, further comprising: in response to detecting the second event and in accordance with determining that the second event is an event that causes a change in the three-dimensional environment visible through the display generation component, displaying via the display generation component a visual indication of the change in the three-dimensional environment visible through the display generation component before initiating the change in the three-dimensional environment visible through the display generation component.

228. 228. The method of claim 227, wherein the change in the three-dimensional environment visible through the display generating component comprises changing from the first three-dimensional environment visible through the display generating component to the second three-dimensional environment visible through the display generating component.

229. 229. The method of claim 227 or 228, wherein the change in the three-dimensional environment that is visible via the display generation component comprises changing a time setting in the three-dimensional environment.

230. 229. The method of claim 227 or 228, wherein the visual indication includes an identification of an individual participant of the first communication session who initiated the change in the three-dimensional environment that is visible via the display generation component.

231. wherein the process of displaying the second three-dimensional environment includes displaying, via the display generation component, a visual indication associated with a change in the currently visible three-dimensional environment, the method comprising:

231. The method of any one of claims 223 to 230, further comprising ceasing to display the visual indication associated with the change in the currently visible three-dimensional environment in response to detecting the first event and in accordance with the determination that the first event does not satisfy the one or more first criteria and the first event satisfies one or more second criteria different from the one or more first criteria, including criteria that are met when the first event includes a request to share the first three-dimensional environment with the first communication session.

232. in response to detecting the first event, in accordance with the determination that the first event does not satisfy the one or more first criteria and satisfies one or more second criteria different from the one or more first criteria, including criteria that are satisfied when the second event corresponds to a request provided by the participant to display a third three-dimensional environment during the first communication session; ceasing visibility of the first three-dimensional environment via the display generation component; and 232. The method of any one of claims 223 to 231, further comprising initiating a process of displaying the third three-dimensional environment via the display generation component, wherein as the user's viewpoint changes, the appearance of the portion of the third three-dimensional environment that is visible to the user changes to the user.

233. detecting, via the one or more input devices, a second event different from the first event while the first three-dimensional environment is visible via the display generation component; 233. The method of any one of claims 223 to 232, further comprising: in response to detecting the second event and in accordance with a determination that the second event includes a request to change the individual three-dimensional environment displayed during the first communication session, displaying, via the generation component, information informing the user of the first computer system that the individual three-dimensional environment displayed at a second computer system associated with the participant will be changed.

234. While the first three-dimensional environment is visible via the display generation component and while the user of the first computer system is in the first communication session with the participants, detecting a first input via the one or more input devices corresponding to a request to display one or more visual representations of one or more three-dimensional environments that can be shared with participants of the first communication session; 234. The method of any one of claims 223 to 233, further comprising, in response to receiving the first input, displaying, via the display generation component, a three-dimensional environment selection user interface including a visual indication of which three-dimensional environments can be shared with participants of the first communication session.

235. the three-dimensional environment selection user interface includes a representation of a respective three-dimensional environment; pursuant to a determination that the personalized three-dimensional environment is available to the participants of the first communication session, the representation of the personalized three-dimensional environment is selectable to initiate a process of sharing the personalized three-dimensional environment with the first communication session; 235. A method according to any one of claims 223 to 234, wherein, following a determination that the individual three-dimensional environment is not available to one or more participants in the first communication session, the representation of the individual three-dimensional environment is not selectable for initiating the process of sharing the individual three-dimensional environment with the first communication session.

236. the first event includes detecting a request to perform the initiation of the first communication session received from a second computer system associated with the participant that is different from the first computer system; 236. A method according to any one of claims 223 to 235, wherein the second three-dimensional environment corresponds to a separate three-dimensional environment displayed on the second computer system when the request to execute the initiation of the first communication session is detected.

237. detecting, via the one or more input devices while a first three-dimensional environment is visible via the display generation component, a second event different from the first event, the second event including a first participant joining the first communication session and a second participant joining the first communication session; In response to detecting the second event, displaying, via the display generation component, a third three-dimensional environment corresponding to the first individual three-dimensional environment in the first communication session in accordance with a determination that the first participant joined the first communication session before the second participant and that an individual computer system associated with the first participant is associated with a first individual three-dimensional environment; 237. The method of any one of claims 223 to 236, further comprising: displaying, via the display generation component, a fourth three-dimensional environment corresponding to the second individual three-dimensional environment in the first communication session in accordance with a determination that the second participant joined the first communication session before the first participant and that an individual computer system associated with the second participant is associated with a second individual three-dimensional environment.

238. 238. A method according to any one of claims 223 to 237, wherein the one or more first criteria include a third criterion that is met when all participants in the first communication session have access to the second three-dimensional environment.

239. in response to detecting the first event and in accordance with the determination that the one or more first criteria are not satisfied, The method of claim 238, further comprising initiating, via the display generation component, a process for displaying a third three-dimensional environment different from the first three-dimensional environment and the second three-dimensional environment in accordance with a determination that one or more second criteria are met, including criteria that are met when all participants in the first communication session do not have access to the second three-dimensional environment, wherein the third three-dimensional environment is a default three-dimensional environment available to all participants in the first communication session.

240. 240. The method of claim 239, wherein the process of displaying the third three-dimensional environment includes displaying information indicating that the third three-dimensional environment will be displayed during the first communication session.

241. the one or more first criteria include a criterion that is met when the participant initiates the first communication session with the user of the first computer system; a criterion that is met when the second three-dimensional environment is being displayed by a second computer system associated with the participant of the first communication session when the participant initiates the first communication session with the user; and a criterion that is met when all participants of the first communication session have access to the second three-dimensional environment, the method comprising: In response to detecting the first event, in response to the determination that the first event does not satisfy the one or more first criteria and in response to a determination that the first event satisfies one or more second criteria, including a criterion that is satisfied when the second three-dimensional environment is unavailable to one or more participants of the first communication session; ceasing visibility of the first three-dimensional environment via the display generation component; and 241. The method of any one of claims 223 to 240, further comprising: executing, via the display generation component, a process for displaying a third three-dimensional environment different from the first three-dimensional environment and the second three-dimensional environment, wherein as the user's viewpoint changes, the appearance of portions of the third three-dimensional environment visible to the user changes to the user, and wherein the third three-dimensional environment is a default three-dimensional environment available to all participants in the first communication session.

242. after detecting the first event, in accordance with the determination that the first event satisfies the one or more first criteria, the second three-dimensional environment is displayed at a first immersion level; 242. A method according to any one of claims 223 to 241, wherein in a view of the first communication session from the perspective of the participant including an individual three-dimensional environment, the individual three-dimensional environment is displayed at a second immersion level different from the first immersion level.

243. prior to detecting the first event, the first three-dimensional environment is visible at a first immersion level; 243. A method according to any one of claims 223 to 242, wherein the process of displaying the second three-dimensional environment in response to detecting the first event and in accordance with the determination that the one or more first criteria are satisfied includes displaying the second three-dimensional environment at a second immersion level different from the first immersion level, the second immersion level being a default immersion level.

244. prior to detecting the first event, the first three-dimensional environment has a first immersion level; The process of displaying the second three-dimensional environment comprises: displaying the second three-dimensional environment at a second level of immersion in accordance with a determination that shared content is being displayed during the first communication session and that the shared content requires a second level of immersion greater than the first level of immersion; 244. The method of any one of claims 223 to 243, comprising: displaying the second three-dimensional environment at the first immersion level in accordance with a determination that shared content requiring the second immersion level is not being displayed during the first communication session.

245. 245. A method according to any one of claims 223 to 244, wherein displaying the second three-dimensional environment includes displaying the second three-dimensional environment in a first visual appearance based on a simulated time setting corresponding to a simulated time setting of an individual three-dimensional environment displayed on a second computer system associated with the participant of the first communication session.

246. obtaining information corresponding to a request by the participant to modify the simulated time setting of the individual three-dimensional environment while displaying the second three-dimensional environment in the first visual appearance; The method of claim 245, further comprising: in response to obtaining the information corresponding to the request by the participant to modify the simulated time setting of the individual three-dimensional environment, changing the visual appearance of the second three-dimensional environment to a second visual appearance different from the first visual appearance corresponding to the modified simulated time setting.

247. 247. The method of claim 246, wherein the request by the participant to modify the simulated time setting of the individual three-dimensional environment corresponds to an explicit input to change the time setting.

248. 248. The method of claim 246 or 247, wherein the request by the participant to modify the simulated time setting of the individual three-dimensional environment corresponds to a request to modify the display of media content within the individual three-dimensional environment.

249. detecting, while displaying the second three-dimensional environment, via the one or more input devices, a second event different from the first event, the second event including a request to modify the second three-dimensional environment based on a modification of virtual content displayed within the second three-dimensional environment; In response to detecting the second event, In accordance with a determination that the virtual content is shared virtual content with the first communication session, initiating a process to modify a separate three-dimensional environment displayed on a second computer system associated with the participant based on the modification of the virtual content displayed in the second three-dimensional environment; 249. The method of any one of claims 223 to 248, further comprising: discontinuing initiation of the process of modifying the individual three-dimensional environment displayed at the second computer system in accordance with a determination that the virtual content is private virtual content.

250. obtaining information that a separate three-dimensional environment shared with the first communication session has been modified while displaying the private virtual content; 250. The method of claim 249, further comprising, in response to obtaining the information that the individual three-dimensional environment has been modified, displaying, via the display generation component, information associated with the modification of the individual three-dimensional environment.

251. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and one or more programs stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions, the instructions Detecting a first event via the one or more input devices while a first three-dimensional environment is viewable via the display generation component; In response to detecting the first event, In response to a determination that the first event satisfies one or more first criteria, the first criteria being met if the first event includes an initiation of a first communication session between a user of the first computer system and a participant of the first communication session different from the user, and a second criterion being met if the first communication session is associated with a second three-dimensional environment different from the first three-dimensional environment; ceasing visibility of the first three-dimensional environment via the display generation component; initiate, via the display generation component, a process for displaying the second three-dimensional environment, wherein an appearance of portions of the second three-dimensional environment visible to the user changes to the user as the user's viewpoint changes; The computer system maintains visibility of the first three-dimensional environment via the display generation component in accordance with a determination that the first event does not satisfy the one or more first criteria.

252. 1. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generating component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to: Detecting a first event via the one or more input devices while a first three-dimensional environment is viewable via the display generation component; In response to detecting the first event, In response to a determination that the first event satisfies one or more first criteria, the first criteria being met if the first event includes an initiation of a first communication session between a user of the first computer system and a participant of the first communication session different from the user, and a second criterion being met if the first communication session is associated with a second three-dimensional environment different from the first three-dimensional environment; ceasing visibility of the first three-dimensional environment via the display generation component; and initiating, via the display generation component, a process for displaying the second three dimensional environment, wherein as the user's viewpoint changes, an appearance of portions of the second three dimensional environment that are visible to the user changes to the user; and maintaining visibility of the first three-dimensional environment via the display generation component in accordance with a determination that the first event does not satisfy the one or more first criteria.

253. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and means for detecting a first event via the one or more input devices while a first three-dimensional environment is viewable via the display generation component; In response to detecting the first event, In response to a determination that the first event satisfies one or more first criteria, the first criteria being met if the first event includes an initiation of a first communication session between a user of the first computer system and a participant of the first communication session different from the user, and a second criterion being met if the first communication session is associated with a second three-dimensional environment different from the first three-dimensional environment; ceasing visibility of the first three-dimensional environment via the display generation component; initiate, via the display generation component, a process for displaying the second three-dimensional environment, wherein an appearance of portions of the second three-dimensional environment visible to the user changes to the user as the user's viewpoint changes; means for maintaining visibility of the first three-dimensional environment via the display generation component according to a determination that the first event does not satisfy the one or more first criteria.

254. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and and one or more programs stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any one of claims 223 to 250.

255. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generating component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to perform the method of any one of claims 223 to 250.

256. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and and means for performing the method of any one of claims 223 to 250.

257. 1. A method comprising: A first computer system in communication with one or more input devices and display generation components, while a first user of the first computer system is in a communication session with a separate participant in the communication session other than the first user, and a first three-dimensional environment associated with the first user in the communication session is visible via the display generation component; In response to a determination that the communication session satisfies a set of one or more criteria, the set of one or more criteria including a requirement that distinct media content that satisfies a second set of one or more criteria be displayed within a three-dimensional environment such that the set of one or more criteria is satisfied; In a view of the communication session from the first user's perspective, a viewpoint of the first user having a first pose within the first three-dimensional environment relative to a location of the respective media content within the first three-dimensional environment; the representation of the individual participant has a second pose within the first three-dimensional environment relative to the location of the individual media content within the first three-dimensional environment that is different from the first pose within the first three-dimensional environment; A method comprising: in a view of the communication session from the perspective of the individual participant, the view including a second three-dimensional environment, the individual participant's viewpoint having a first pose within the second three-dimensional environment relative to a location of the individual media content within the second three-dimensional environment, the first pose within the second three-dimensional environment being different from the second pose within the first three-dimensional environment.

258. the individual participant is a first participant; 258. The method of claim 257, wherein the communication session further includes a second participant.

259. 258. The method of claim 3, wherein the set of one or more criteria includes a requirement that a particular piece of media content be playing for the set of one or more criteria to be met.

260. while the first user of the first computer system is in the communication session with the individual participant in the communication session other than the first user, and while the first three-dimensional environment associated with the first user in the communication session is visible via the display generation component; in response to a determination that the communication session does not satisfy the set of one or more criteria; In the view of the communication session from the perspective of the first user, the viewpoint of the first user has a third pose within the first three-dimensional environment relative to the location of the respective media content within the first three-dimensional environment; the representation of the individual participant has a fourth pose within the first three-dimensional environment relative to the location of the individual media content within the first three-dimensional environment; A method according to any one of claims 257 to 259, wherein in the view of the communication session from the perspective of the individual participant including the second three-dimensional environment, the viewpoint of the individual participant has the fourth pose within the second three-dimensional environment relative to the location of the individual media content within the second three-dimensional environment, and the fourth pose within the second three-dimensional environment and the fourth pose within the first three-dimensional environment are the same pose relative to the individual location of the media content.

261. in accordance with the determination that the communication session does not satisfy the set of one or more criteria; in the view of the communication session from the perspective of the first user, the fourth pose of the representation of the individual participant is spatially offset from a predetermined viewing location of the first three-dimensional environment; 261. The method of claim 260, wherein in the view of the communication session from the perspective of the individual participant, a representation of the first user is spatially offset from a predetermined viewing location of the second three-dimensional environment.

262. 262. The method of any one of claims 257 to 261, wherein the first three-dimensional environment and the second three-dimensional environment are the same three-dimensional environment.

263. In accordance with the determination that the communication session satisfies the set of one or more criteria, In the view of the communication session from the perspective of the first user, the first pose in the first three-dimensional environment relative to the location of the individual media content within the first three-dimensional environment is within a threshold range of one or more poses relative to the location of the individual media content within the first three-dimensional environment; in the view of the communication session from the perspective of the individual participant, the view including the second three-dimensional environment; 263. A method according to any one of claims 257 to 262, wherein the first orientation in the second three-dimensional environment relative to the location of the individual media content in the first three-dimensional environment is within the threshold range of one or more orientations relative to the individual location of media content in the second three-dimensional environment.

264. In accordance with the determination that the communication session satisfies the set of one or more criteria, In the view of the communication session from the perspective of the first user, the first pose of the viewpoint of the first user corresponds to a first viewing angle with respect to the respective media content; 264. The method of claim 263, wherein the second pose of the representation of the individual participant corresponds to a second viewing angle of the individual media content that is different from the first viewing angle.

265. while the first user of the first computer system is in the communication session with the individual participant in the communication session other than the first user, and while the first three-dimensional environment associated with the first user in the communication session is visible via the display generation component; In accordance with the determination that the communication session satisfies the set of one or more criteria, in a view of the communication session from the perspective of the first user, the first three-dimensional environment includes a respective representation of the respective participant, and the set of criteria includes a requirement that the respective media content displayed in the three-dimensional environment be non-immersive, such that a second set of criteria is satisfied; pursuant to a determination that the communication session satisfies a second set of one or more criteria different from the set of criteria, the second set of one or more criteria including a requirement that the respective media content displayed within a three-dimensional environment be immersive content, such that the second set of one or more criteria is satisfied; the view of the communication session from the perspective of the first user does not include a representation of the individual participants; 265. The method of any one of claims 257 to 264, wherein a view of the communication session from the perspective of the individual participant including the second three-dimensional environment does not include a representation of the first user.

266. 266. The method of claim 265, wherein while the first user of the first computer system is in the communication session with the individual participants other than the first user in the communication session, while the first three-dimensional environment associated with the first user in the communication session is visible via the display generation component, audio corresponding to audio of the individual participants in the communication session is presented in accordance with the determination that a second set of one or more criteria is satisfied.

267. pursuant to a determination that a second set of one or more criteria is satisfied while the first user of the first computer system is in the communication session with the individual participants in the communication session other than the first user, while the first three-dimensional environment associated with the first user in the communication session is visible via the display generation component, the second set of one or more criteria including a requirement that individual media content that is immersive content be displayed within the three-dimensional environment such that the second set of one or more criteria is satisfied; detecting an event corresponding to a change in a viewpoint of the first user via the one or more input devices; In response to detecting the event corresponding to a change in the viewpoint of the first user, 267. The method of any one of claims 257 to 266, comprising: resetting the individual media content within the first three-dimensional environment to the second viewpoint of the first user if the second viewpoint is outside a viewpoint threshold range of the first viewpoint in accordance with a determination that the event corresponds to a change in viewpoint from a first viewpoint to a second viewpoint.

268. the set of one or more criteria includes a requirement that distinct media content be displayed at distinct media content locations within the three-dimensional environment for the set of one or more criteria to be met; responsive to a determination that the set of one or more criteria is not met while the first user of the first computer system is in the communication session with the individual participant other than the first user in the communication session and the first three-dimensional environment associated with the first user in the communication session is visible via the display generation component; In the view of the communication session from the perspective of the first user, the viewpoint of the first user has a third pose within the first three-dimensional environment relative to the location of the respective media content within the first three-dimensional environment; the representation of the individual participant has a fourth pose within the first three-dimensional environment relative to the location of the individual media content within the first three-dimensional environment; in the view of the communication session from the perspective of the individual participant including the second three-dimensional environment, the viewpoint of the individual participant having the fourth pose in the second three-dimensional environment relative to the location of the individual media content in the second three-dimensional environment, the fourth pose in the second three-dimensional environment and the fourth pose in the first three-dimensional environment being the same pose relative to the individual location of media content; The method comprises: pursuant to the determination that the set of one or more criteria is not met while the first user of the first computer system is in the communication session with the individual participant in the communication session other than the first user and the first three-dimensional environment associated with the first user in the communication session is visible via the display generation component; obtaining information corresponding to a request to display the respective media content at the respective location of the media content within the first three-dimensional environment; in response to obtaining the information corresponding to the request to display the respective media content at the respective location of the media content within the first three-dimensional environment; the set of one or more criteria is met, in a view of the communication session from the perspective of the first user; the viewpoint of the first user has the first pose within the first three-dimensional environment relative to a location of the respective media content within the first three-dimensional environment; the representation of the individual participant has a second pose within the first three-dimensional environment relative to the location of the individual media content within the first three-dimensional environment that is different from the first pose within the first three-dimensional environment; 268. A method according to any one of claims 257 to 267, wherein in a view of the communication session from the perspective of the individual participant, including the second three-dimensional environment, the viewpoint of the individual participant has the first pose in the second three-dimensional environment relative to the location of the individual media content in the second three-dimensional environment, and the first pose in the second three-dimensional environment is different from the second pose in the first three-dimensional environment.

269. in response to obtaining the information corresponding to the request to display the respective media content at the respective location of the media content within the first three-dimensional environment; reducing the visual salience of the first three-dimensional environment, including reducing the visual salience of the representation of the individual participant, wherein while reducing the visual salience of the first three-dimensional environment: In the view of the communication session from the perspective of the first user, the viewpoint of the first user has a third pose within the first three-dimensional environment relative to the location of the respective media content within the first three-dimensional environment; the representation of the individual participant has a fourth pose within the first three-dimensional environment relative to the location of the individual media content within the first three-dimensional environment; In the view of the communication session from the perspective of the individual participant including the second three-dimensional environment, the viewpoint of the individual participant has the fourth pose in the second three-dimensional environment relative to the location of the individual media content in the second three-dimensional environment, and the fourth pose in the second three-dimensional environment and the fourth pose in the first three-dimensional environment are the same pose relative to the individual location of media content; and increasing the visual salience of the first three-dimensional environment, comprising increasing the visual salience of the representation of the individual participant after reducing the visual salience of the first three-dimensional environment, comprising reducing the visual salience of the representation of the individual participant having the fourth pose within the first three-dimensional environment, wherein during increasing the visual salience of the first three-dimensional environment, comprising increasing the visual salience of the representation of the individual participant, the set of one or more criteria is met, in a view of the communication session from the perspective of the first user; the viewpoint of the first user has the first pose within the first three-dimensional environment relative to a location of the respective media content within the first three-dimensional environment; the representation of the individual participant has a second pose within the first three-dimensional environment relative to the location of the individual media content within the first three-dimensional environment that is different from the first pose within the first three-dimensional environment; 269. The method of claim 268, wherein in a view of the communication session from the perspective of the individual participant, including the second three-dimensional environment, the viewpoint of the individual participant has the first pose in the second three-dimensional environment relative to the location of the individual media content in the second three-dimensional environment, and the first pose in the second three-dimensional environment is different from the second pose in the first three-dimensional environment.

270. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and one or more programs stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions, the instructions while a first user of the first computer system is in a communication session with a separate participant in the communication session other than the first user, and a first three-dimensional environment associated with the first user in the communication session is visible via the display generation component; In response to a determination that the communication session satisfies a set of one or more criteria, the set of one or more criteria including a requirement that distinct media content that satisfies a second set of one or more criteria be displayed within a three-dimensional environment such that the set of one or more criteria is satisfied; In a view of the communication session from the first user's perspective, a viewpoint of the first user having a first pose within the first three-dimensional environment relative to a location of the respective media content within the first three-dimensional environment; the representation of the individual participant has a second pose within the first three-dimensional environment relative to the location of the individual media content within the first three-dimensional environment that is different from the first pose within the first three-dimensional environment; A computer system, wherein in a view of the communication session from the perspective of the individual participant, the view includes a second three-dimensional environment, the individual participant's viewpoint has a first pose within the second three-dimensional environment relative to a location of the individual media content within the second three-dimensional environment, the first pose within the second three-dimensional environment being different from the second pose within the first three-dimensional environment.

271. 1. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generating component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to: while a first user of the first computer system is in a communication session with a separate participant in the communication session other than the first user, and a first three-dimensional environment associated with the first user in the communication session is visible via the display generation component; In response to a determination that the communication session satisfies a set of one or more criteria, the set of one or more criteria including a requirement that distinct media content that satisfies a second set of one or more criteria be displayed within a three-dimensional environment such that the set of one or more criteria is satisfied; In a view of the communication session from the first user's perspective, a viewpoint of the first user having a first pose within the first three-dimensional environment relative to a location of the respective media content within the first three-dimensional environment; the representation of the individual participant has a second pose within the first three-dimensional environment relative to the location of the individual media content within the first three-dimensional environment that is different from the first pose within the first three-dimensional environment; A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium that executes a method, comprising: in a view of the communication session from the perspective of the individual participant, the view of the communication session including a second three-dimensional environment, the individual participant's viewpoint having a first pose within the second three-dimensional environment relative to a location of the individual media content within the second three-dimensional environment, the first pose within the second three-dimensional environment being different from the second pose within the first three-dimensional environment.

272. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and while a first user of the first computer system is in a communication session with a separate participant in the communication session other than the first user, and a first three-dimensional environment associated with the first user in the communication session is visible via the display generation component; In response to a determination that the communication session satisfies a set of one or more criteria, the set of one or more criteria including a requirement that distinct media content that satisfies a second set of one or more criteria be displayed within a three-dimensional environment such that the set of one or more criteria is satisfied; In a view of the communication session from the first user's perspective, a viewpoint of the first user having a first pose within the first three-dimensional environment relative to a location of the respective media content within the first three-dimensional environment; the representation of the individual participant has a second pose within the first three-dimensional environment relative to the location of the individual media content within the first three-dimensional environment that is different from the first pose within the first three-dimensional environment; 11. A computer system comprising: means for displaying a view of the communication session from the perspective of the individual participant, the view including a second three-dimensional environment, the individual participant's viewpoint having a first pose within the second three-dimensional environment relative to a location of the individual media content within the second three-dimensional environment, the first pose within the second three-dimensional environment being different from the second pose within the first three-dimensional environment.

273. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and and one or more programs stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any one of claims 257 to 269.

274. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generating component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to perform the method of any one of claims 257 to 269.

275. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and and means for performing the method of any one of claims 257 to 269.

276. 1. A method comprising:

1. A computer system in communication with one or more input devices and display generating components, comprising: receiving, via the one or more input devices, a first input corresponding to a request by a user of the computer system to join a communication session including first shared content accessible to one or more participants of the communication session other than the user of the computer system; responsive to receiving the first input, joining the communication session, the joining comprising: pursuant to a determination that a first set of one or more criteria is satisfied, the first set of one or more criteria including a requirement that a first parameter of the first shared content have a first value for the first set of one or more criteria to be satisfied, displaying within the three-dimensional environment and via the display generation component one or more representations of the one or more participants in the communication session; and displaying, within the three-dimensional environment via the display generation component, second one or more representations of the one or more participants in the communication session in accordance with a determination that a second set of one or more criteria is met, the one or more criteria including a requirement that the first parameter of the first shared content have a second value that is different from the first value for the second set of one or more criteria to be met.

277. the first value of the first parameter of the first shared content indicates that the first shared content includes an application window, and the method further comprises: In response to receiving the first input, joining the communication session, wherein joining includes:

277. The method of claim 276, further comprising: presenting a third representation of the one or more participants without displaying representations of the one or more participants in the three-dimensional environment in accordance with a determination that the third set of one or more criteria is met, the third set of one or more criteria including a requirement that the first parameter of the first shared content have a third value for the third set of one or more criteria to be met, the third value indicating that the first shared content is immersive content.

278. the first value of the first parameter of the first shared content indicates that the computer system is entitled to view the first shared content; the first one or more representations of the one or more participants in the communication session include a first representation of a first one of the one or more participants having a first amount of visual detail; the second value of the first parameter of the first shared content indicates that the computer system is not entitled to view the first shared content; 278. The method of claim 276 or 277, wherein the second one or more representations of the one or more participants in the communication session include a second representation of the first of the one or more participants having a second amount of visual detail that is less than the first amount of visual detail.

279. 279. The method of claim 278, wherein the first representation of the first participant of the one or more participants includes a first visual element having the appearance of a head representation corresponding to the first participant and / or a second visual element having the appearance of a hand representation corresponding to the first participant.

280. 279. The method of claim 278 or 279, wherein the first visual element having the appearance of the representation of the head corresponding to the first participant moves relative to the second visual element having the appearance of the representation of the hand corresponding to the first participant.

281. 281. A method according to any one of claims 278 to 280, wherein the second representation of the first participant of the one or more participants in the communication session does not include a visual element having the appearance of a head representation corresponding to the first participant and / or a visual element having the appearance of a hand representation corresponding to the first participant.

282. 282. The method of any one of claims 278 to 281, wherein the second representation of the first of the one or more participants in the communication session is a representation of a geometric shape or a monogram.

283. the first one or more representations of the one or more participants in the communication session include a first representation of a first one of the one or more participants having a first amount of visual detail; the second one or more representations of the one or more participants in the communication session include a second representation of the first of the one or more participants having a second amount of visual detail that is less than the first amount of visual detail; 283. The method of any one of claims 276 to 282, wherein the second value of the first parameter of the first shared content indicates that the first shared content is to be displayed at a separate location of media content within the three-dimensional environment.

284. receiving, while displaying the first shared content at the respective location of media content within the three-dimensional environment, a second input via the one or more input devices corresponding to a request to cease displaying the first shared content at the respective location of media content within the three-dimensional environment, wherein the second one or more representations of the one or more participants in the communication session, including the second representation of the first participant, are displayed when the second input is received; and in response to receiving the second input via the one or more input devices, ceasing to display the first shared content at the respective location of media content within the three-dimensional environment; and displaying, via the display generation component, the first shared content at a location within the three-dimensional environment that is different from the respective location of the media content within the three-dimensional environment; and displaying, via the display generation component, the first one or more representations of the one or more participants in the communication session, including the first representation of the first participant of the one or more participants.

285. In response to receiving the first input, joining the communication session, wherein joining includes: and ceasing to display representations of the one or more participants in the communication session in accordance with a determination that a third set of one or more criteria is satisfied, the third set of one or more criteria including a requirement that the first parameter of the first shared content have a third value that is different from the first value and the second value, the third value indicating that the first shared content is immersive content.

286. the first one or more representations of the one or more participants in the communication session include a first representation of a first one of the one or more participants having a first amount of visual detail; when the first representation of a first one of the one or more participants in the communication session is displayed with the first amount of visual detail in a view of the communication session from the perspective of the user of the computer system, the second one or more representations of the one or more participants in the communication session include a second representation of the one or more first participants having a second amount of visual detail that is less than the first amount of visual detail; a representation of the user of the computer system having the first amount of visual detail in a view of the communication session from the perspective of the first participant; when the first representation of the first participant of the one or more participants in the communication session is displayed with the second amount of visual detail in the view of the communication session from the perspective of the user of the computer system; 286. The method of any one of claims 276 to 285, wherein a representation of the user of the computer system having the second amount of visual detail is displayed in a view of the communication session from the perspective of the first participant.

287. when the first shared content is displayed in a window that can be positioned at a plurality of different locations within the three-dimensional environment based on user input; 287. A method according to any one of claims 276 to 286, wherein the first set of one or more criteria and / or the second set of one or more criteria are met regardless of whether the computer system is eligible to display the first shared content.

288. In response to receiving the first input, joining the communication session, wherein joining includes: displaying, within the three-dimensional environment via the display generation component, the first shared content in accordance with a determination that the computer system is eligible to display the first shared content; 288. The method of claim 287, comprising: displaying a representation of the location of the first shared content within the three-dimensional environment without fully displaying the first shared content in accordance with a determination that the computer system is not eligible to view the first shared content, and displaying the first shared content via the display generation component.

289. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and one or more programs stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions, the instructions receiving, via the one or more input devices, a first input by a user of the computer system corresponding to a request to join a communication session including first shared content accessible to one or more participants of the communication session other than the user of the computer system; a computer system that, in response to receiving the first input, joins the communication session, the joining comprising: pursuant to a determination that a first set of one or more criteria is satisfied, the first set of one or more criteria including a requirement that a first parameter of the first shared content have a first value for the first set of one or more criteria to be satisfied, displaying within the three-dimensional environment and via the display generation component one or more representations of the one or more participants in the communication session; and displaying, within the three-dimensional environment via the display generation component, second one or more representations of the one or more participants in the communication session in accordance with a determination that a second set of one or more criteria is met, the one or more criteria including a requirement that the first parameter of the first shared content have a second value that is different from the first value for the second set of one or more criteria to be met, wherein the second one or more representations are different from the first one or more representations.

290. 1. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generating component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to: receiving, via the one or more input devices, a first input corresponding to a request by a user of the computer system to join a communication session including first shared content accessible to one or more participants of the communication session other than the user of the computer system; and performing a method comprising: joining the communication session in response to receiving the first input, the joining comprising: pursuant to a determination that a first set of one or more criteria is satisfied, the first set of one or more criteria including a requirement that a first parameter of the first shared content have a first value for the first set of one or more criteria to be satisfied, displaying within the three-dimensional environment and via the display generation component one or more representations of the one or more participants in the communication session; and displaying, within the three-dimensional environment via the display generation component, second one or more representations of the one or more participants in the communication session in accordance with a determination that a second set of one or more criteria is satisfied, the one or more criteria including a requirement that the first parameter of the first shared content have a second value that is different from the first value for the second set of one or more criteria to be satisfied.

291. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and receiving, via the one or more input devices, a first input by a user of the computer system corresponding to a request to join a communication session including first shared content accessible to one or more participants of the communication session other than the user of the computer system; a computer system including: means for joining the communication session in response to receiving the first input, the joining comprising: pursuant to a determination that a first set of one or more criteria is satisfied, the first set of one or more criteria including a requirement that a first parameter of the first shared content have a first value for the first set of one or more criteria to be satisfied, displaying within the three-dimensional environment and via the display generation component one or more representations of the one or more participants in the communication session; and displaying, within the three-dimensional environment via the display generation component, second one or more representations of the one or more participants in the communication session in accordance with a determination that a second set of one or more criteria is met, the one or more criteria including a requirement that the first parameter of the first shared content have a second value that is different from the first value for the second set of one or more criteria to be met, wherein the second one or more representations are different from the first one or more representations.

292. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and and one or more programs stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any one of claims 276 to 288.

293. 289. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generating component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to perform the method of any one of claims 276 to 288.

294. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and and means for performing the method of any one of claims 276 to 288.

295. 1. A method comprising:

1. A computer system in communication with one or more input devices and display generating components, comprising: While displaying media content within a three-dimensional environment via the display generation component, detecting a first input via the one or more input devices corresponding to a request to display one or more first selectable options selectable for modifying an appearance of the three-dimensional environment; and in response to detecting the first input, displaying, via the display generation component, the one or more first selectable options, wherein the one or more first selectable options include: a first selectable option selectable to initiate a process of displaying the media content in a system environment associated with an operating system of the computer system, the system environment being configured for a plurality of different types of virtual content to be displayed by the computer system; and a second selectable option different from the first selectable option, the second selectable option being selectable to initiate a process of displaying the media content in a media playback environment different from the system environment, the media playback environment being limited to being displayed by the computer system when the computer system is displaying the media content.

296. detecting, while displaying the one or more first selectable options, a selection input directed to a respective selectable option of the one or more first selectable options via the one or more input devices; In response to detecting the selection input, displaying the media content within the system environment via the display generation component in accordance with a determination that the respective selectable option is the first selectable option; 300. The method of claim 295, further comprising: displaying the media content within the media playback environment via the display generation component in accordance with a determination that the respective selectable option is the second selectable option.

297. detecting, via the one or more input devices, a second input corresponding to a request to display one or more second selectable options associated with modifying the appearance of the three-dimensional environment prior to displaying the media content within the three-dimensional environment; The method of claim 295 or 296, further comprising: in response to detecting the second input, displaying, via the display generation component, one or more second selectable options selectable for initiating a process of modifying the visual appearance of the three-dimensional environment, the second selectable options not including a separate selectable option selectable for initiating the process of displaying the media playback environment, in accordance with a determination that one or more criteria are met, including criteria that are met when media content is not displayed within the three-dimensional environment when the second input is detected.

298. 300. The method of any one of claims 295 to 297, wherein the one or more first selectable options are displayed within a virtual object including the media content, the options including a light / dark mode option.

299. the process of displaying the media content within the system environment in response to selecting the first selectable option includes displaying the system environment with a first visual appearance corresponding to a first time setting of the system environment; 299. The method of any one of claims 295 to 298, wherein the one or more first selectable items include a third selectable option different from the first selectable option and the second selectable option that is selectable to initiate a process of displaying the media content in the system environment in a second visual appearance different from the first visual appearance that corresponds to a second time setting of the system environment.

300. detecting, via the one or more input devices before detecting the first input, a second input different from the first input corresponding to a request to display the three-dimensional environment in a first visual appearance corresponding to a first time setting of the three-dimensional environment; and, in response to detecting the second input, displaying, via the display generation component, the media content within the three-dimensional environment in the first visual appearance corresponding to the first time setting of the three-dimensional environment, the first input being detected while the three-dimensional environment has the first visual appearance in response to detecting the second input. While displaying the media content within the second three-dimensional environment with a distinct first visual appearance corresponding to the first time setting of the second three-dimensional environment, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a third input different from the first input and the second input, corresponding to a request to initiate a process of displaying the second three-dimensional environment with a distinct second visual appearance different from the distinct first visual appearance corresponding to a second time setting of the second three-dimensional environment; In response to detecting the third input, initiating, via the display generation component, a process for displaying the media content within the second three-dimensional environment having the distinct second visual appearance; While displaying the media content within the second three-dimensional environment with the distinct second visual appearance, detecting a fourth input via the one or more input devices, the fourth input being distinct from the first input, the second input, and the third input, corresponding to a request to change the display of the media content within the second three-dimensional environment; In response to detecting the fourth input, displaying, via the display generation component, the media content in the third three-dimensional environment having a distinct first visual appearance corresponding to the first time setting of the third three-dimensional environment in accordance with a determination that the third input satisfies one or more criteria, including criteria that are satisfied when the third input is directed at a user interface that is displayed in response to the input being directed at a region of the second three-dimensional environment that corresponds to the media content; 300. The method of any one of claims 295 to 299, further comprising: displaying, via the display generation component, the media content within the third three-dimensional environment with a distinct second visual appearance corresponding to the second time setting of the third three-dimensional environment in accordance with a determination that the third input does not satisfy the one or more criteria because the third input is directed to a system user interface associated with controlling one or more system functions of the computer system.

301. The system user interface includes a visual indication of a currently active time setting, and the method further comprises: displaying the second three-dimensional environment in the second visual appearance in response to detecting the third input that satisfies the one or more criteria and before detecting the fourth input, wherein displaying the media content in the second three-dimensional environment in the second visual appearance in response to the third input is performed in accordance with a determination that the third input has satisfied the one or more criteria; 301. The method of claim 300, further comprising: while displaying the second three-dimensional environment in the second visual appearance, displaying the system user interface including a visual indication that the second time setting corresponding to the second visual appearance is currently active.

302. detecting, while displaying the one or more first selectable options, a second input via the one or more input devices, the second input comprising a first selection of the first selectable option, the second input being different from the first input; 302. The method of any one of claims 295 to 301, further comprising: initiating the process of displaying the media content within the system environment in response to detecting the second input, the process comprising displaying the media content in a respective position of the media content within the system environment.

303. detecting, via the one or more input devices, a third input different from the first input and the second input, the third input including a second selection of the first selectable option while displaying the one or more first selectable options and the media content in the respective positions of the media content within the system environment; 303. The method of claim 302, further comprising: initiating a process for displaying the media content in an updated position that is different from the individual position of the media content in the system environment in response to detecting the third input.

304. while displaying a first system environment associated with the operating system of the computer system prior to displaying the media content; detecting a first one or more inputs via the one or more input devices, the first one or more inputs including a request to begin displaying the media content; 304. The method of any one of claims 295 to 303, further comprising: displaying the media content in the first system environment in response to detecting the first one or more inputs including the request.

305. and while displaying the media content in the system environment prior to detecting the first input, displaying via the display generation component a system user interface associated with the operating system of the computer system, the system user interface including one or more second selectable options different from the one or more first selectable options, and including a third selectable option different from the first selectable options and the second selectable options, selectable to initiate a process of displaying the media content in an alternative system environment associated with the operating system of the computer system; detecting, while displaying the one or more second selectable options including the third selectable option, a discrete input via the one or more input devices selecting the third selectable option; 305. The method of any one of claims 295 to 304, further comprising: in response to detecting the discrete input, displaying the media content in the alternative system environment via the display generation component.

306. 306. The method of claim 305, wherein the system user interface includes a fourth selectable option selectable for setting the visual appearance of the visible three-dimensional environment to correspond to the current time on the computer system, different from the first selectable option, the second selectable option, and the third selectable option, and wherein the one or more first selectable options do not include a separate selectable option selectable for setting the visual appearance of the three-dimensional environment to correspond to the current time on the computer system.

307. detecting a first selection input directed toward the second selectable option via the one or more input devices; displaying the media content in the media playback environment via the display generation component in response to detecting the first selection input; 307. The method of any one of claims 295 to 306, further comprising: while displaying the media content within the media playback environment, displaying, via the display generation component, a media control user interface including a third selectable option, different from the first selectable option and the second selectable option, selectable to initiate a process of changing the spatial relationship between the user's viewpoint and the media content within the media playback environment.

308. detecting a second input, different from the first input, via the one or more input devices while displaying the media content within the three-dimensional environment via the display generation component before the first input is detected; and in response to detecting the second input, displaying, via the display generation component, one or more second selectable options different from the one or more first selectable options, wherein the one or more second selectable options are: a third selectable option selectable to initiate a process of displaying the individual three-dimensional environment in accordance with a determination that the second input is detected while the media content is not displayed at an individual position of media content within the three-dimensional environment, the media content not being movable from the individual position within the three-dimensional environment; 308. The method of any one of claims 295 to 307, wherein, in accordance with a determination that the second input is detected while the media content is displayed at the individual position, the second one or more first selectable options do not include the third selectable option that is selectable to initiate a process of presenting one or more alternative three-dimensional environments.

309. detecting, via the one or more input devices, a third input different from the first input and the second input and corresponding to a request to stop displaying the media content at the respective position of the media content while the media content is being displayed at the respective position of the media content; displaying the media content at an updated position within the three-dimensional environment via the display generation component in response to the third input; While displaying the media content at the updated position, detecting a fourth input, different from the first, second, and third inputs, via the one or more input devices, corresponding to a request to display the one or more first selectable options selectable for modifying an appearance of the three-dimensional environment; 309. The method of claim 308, further comprising: in response to detecting the fourth input, displaying, via the display generation component, the one or more second selectable options including the third selectable option.

310. detecting, while displaying the media content in the system environment, a second input, different from the first input, via the one or more input devices, corresponding to a request to modify an immersion level of the system environment; In response to detecting the second input, modifying the immersion level of the system environment according to the second input; detecting, while displaying the media content in the media playback environment, via the one or more input devices, a third input different from the first input and the second input, the third input corresponding to a request to change an immersion level of the media playback environment; 310. The method of any one of claims 295 to 309, further comprising: in response to detecting the third input, ceasing to modify the immersion level of the media playback environment by the second input.

311. detecting, via the one or more input devices, a second input different from the first input corresponding to a request to display a home user interface associated with the computer system while the media content is displayed at the respective position of the media content within the respective three-dimensional environment; In response to detecting the second input, ceasing the display of the media content and the individual three-dimensional environment and displaying, via the display generation component, the home user interface including individual selectable options associated with a plurality of system environments; detecting, while displaying the individual selectable options in the home user interface, via the one or more input devices, a third input distinct from the first input and the second input, the third input corresponding to a selection of the individual selectable option; The method of any one of claims 295 to 310, further comprising: in response to detecting the third input, displaying, via the display generation component, a plurality of selectable representations corresponding to the plurality of system environments that are selectable to initiate a process of displaying the media content within the corresponding system environments, wherein the process of displaying the media content within the system environments could not be initiated while the media content is displayed at the respective position of the media content within the respective three-dimensional environment.

312. detecting, while displaying the media content within the system environment, the system environment being displayed at a particular immersion level, one or more second inputs, different from the first input, via the one or more input devices, the second inputs including a request to display the media playback environment; In response to detecting the second one or more inputs, ceasing the display of the system environment; commencing displaying the media playback environment including the media content at a first immersion level different from the individual immersion level; While displaying the media playback environment including the media content at the first immersion level, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a third one or more inputs different from the first input and the second one or more inputs, the third inputs comprising a request to display the system environment; In response to the third one or more inputs: displaying, via the display generation component, the system environment including the media content having the second immersion level in accordance with determining that the individual immersion level was a second immersion level; and 312. The method of any one of claims 295 to 311, further comprising: displaying, via the display generation component, the system environment including the media content having the third immersion level in accordance with a determination that the individual immersion level was a third immersion level different from the second immersion level.

313. 313. The method of any one of claims 295 to 312, further comprising: displaying the first one or more first selectable options and the media content at a location within the three-dimensional environment other than a respective position of the media content within the three-dimensional environment; and detecting, via the one or more input devices, a second input different from the first input corresponding to a selection of the second selectable option, wherein the process of displaying the media content within the media playback environment comprises displaying the media content at a respective position of the media content within the media playback environment.

314. while displaying the media content within the three-dimensional environment with a visual appearance corresponding to a first time setting of the three-dimensional environment; detecting a second input via the one or more input devices, the second input being different from the first input; In response to detecting the second input, displaying, via the display generation component, a system user interface associated with an operating system of the computer system, the system user interface including one or more second selectable options different from the one or more first selectable options, including a third selectable option different from the first selectable option and the second selectable option, selectable to initiate a process of changing a time setting of the three-dimensional environment from the first time setting to a second time setting different from the first time setting; detecting, via the one or more input devices, a third input directed toward the third selectable option, the third input being different from the first input and the second input, while displaying the second one or more first selectable options including the third selectable option; 314. The method of any one of claims 295 to 313, further comprising: in response to detecting the third input, changing the visual appearance of the three-dimensional environment to correspond to a second time setting different from the first time setting.

315. 315. The method of claim 314, wherein the second input comprises an air gesture associated with a system function of the computer system.

316. 316. The method of claim 314 or 315, wherein the third selectable option is displayed in the system user interface without requiring additional user input when the system user interface is displayed.

317. the system user interface includes a control element corresponding to an ambient audio volume control for the three-dimensional environment, and the method further comprises: detecting, via the one or more input devices, a third input distinct from the first input and the second input, directed at the control element and corresponding to a request to change an ambient audio volume level for the three-dimensional environment; 317. The method of any one of claims 314 to 316, further comprising: in response to detecting the third input, changing the level of ambient audio volume of the three-dimensional environment from a first level to a second level without changing the audio volume of the media content.

318. the system user interface includes a control element corresponding to a system audio volume control for the three-dimensional environment, and the method further comprises: detecting a third input, different from the first input and the second input, directed at the control element via the one or more input devices and corresponding to a request to change the system audio volume level; 318. The method of any one of claims 314 to 317, further comprising: in response to detecting the third input, changing an ambient audio volume level of the three-dimensional environment from a first level to a second level and changing an audio volume of the media content from a third level to a fourth level.

319. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and one or more programs stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions, the instructions While displaying media content within a three-dimensional environment via the display generation component, detect, via the one or more input devices, a first input corresponding to a request to display one or more first selectable options selectable for modifying an appearance of the three-dimensional environment; and displaying, via the display generation component, the one or more first selectable options in response to detecting the first input, wherein the one or more first selectable options include: a first selectable option selectable to initiate a process of displaying the media content in a system environment associated with an operating system of the computer system, the system environment being configured for a plurality of different types of virtual content to be displayed by the computer system; and a second selectable option different from the first selectable option, the second selectable option selectable to initiate a process of displaying the media content in a media playback environment different from the system environment, the media playback environment being restricted to being displayed by the computer system when the computer system is displaying the media content.

320. 1. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generating component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to: While displaying media content within a three-dimensional environment via the display generation component, detecting a first input via the one or more input devices corresponding to a request to display one or more first selectable options selectable for modifying an appearance of the three-dimensional environment; and displaying, via the display generation component, the one or more first selectable options in response to detecting the first input, wherein the one or more first selectable options include: a first selectable option selectable to initiate a process of displaying the media content in a system environment associated with an operating system of the computer system, the system environment being configured for a plurality of different types of virtual content to be displayed by the computer system; and a second selectable option different from the first selectable option, the second selectable option being selectable to initiate a process of displaying the media content in a media playback environment different from the system environment, the media playback environment being restricted to being displayed by the computer system when the computer system is displaying the media content.

321. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and means for detecting, while displaying media content within a three-dimensional environment via the display generation component, a first input via the one or more input devices corresponding to a request to display one or more first selectable options selectable for modifying an appearance of the three-dimensional environment; means for displaying, via the display generation component, the one or more first selectable options in response to detecting the first input, wherein the one or more first selectable options include: a first selectable option selectable to initiate a process of displaying the media content in a system environment associated with an operating system of the computer system, the system environment being configured for a plurality of different types of virtual content to be displayed by the computer system; and a second selectable option different from the first selectable option, the second selectable option selectable to initiate a process of displaying the media content in a media playback environment different from the system environment, the media playback environment being restricted to being displayed by the computer system when the computer system is displaying the media content.

322. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and and one or more programs stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any one of claims 295 to 318.

323. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generating component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to perform the method of any one of claims 295 to 318.

324. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and and means for performing the method of any one of claims 295 to 318.

325. 1. A method comprising:

1. A computer system in communication with one or more input devices and display generating components, comprising: while displaying, via the display generation component, a three-dimensional environment including content in a first presentation mode, the three-dimensional environment including the content; an environment mode of the three-dimensional environment for controlling a visual appearance of the three-dimensional environment outside of the content is a separate environment mode; displaying a three-dimensional environment outside the content, the three-dimensional environment having a distinct visual appearance based on the distinct environment mode; detecting, via the one or more input devices, a first input for displaying the content in a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode, while displaying, via the display generation component, the three-dimensional environment outside the content in the individual environment mode having the individual visual appearance based on the individual environment mode; in response to detecting the first input via the one or more input devices; displaying the content in the second presentation mode, different from the first presentation mode, via the display generation component; When the first input is detected, in accordance with a determination that the individual environment mode is a first environment mode and the individual visual appearance is a first visual appearance, displaying, via the display generation component, the three-dimensional environment including the content, wherein while displaying the three-dimensional environment including the content, the three-dimensional environment outside the content is displayed with a second visual appearance based on the first environment mode, different from the first visual appearance; and continuing to display the three-dimensional environment including the content via the display generation component in accordance with a determination that the individual environmental mode is a second environmental mode different from the first environmental mode and the individual visual appearance is the first visual appearance when the first input is detected, wherein while displaying the three-dimensional environment including the content, the three-dimensional environment outside the content is displayed in the first visual appearance.

326. in response to detecting the first input via the one or more input devices; 326. The method of claim 325, further comprising: continuing to display the three-dimensional environment including the content via the display generation component in accordance with a determination that, when the first input is detected, the individual environmental mode is a third environmental mode different from the first environmental mode and the second environmental mode, and the individual visual appearance of the three-dimensional environment outside the content is the second visual appearance, wherein the three-dimensional environment outside the content has the second visual appearance.

327. in response to detecting the first input via the one or more input devices; The method of claim 325 or 326, further comprising, in accordance with a determination that the individual environment mode is the first environment mode and the individual visual appearance of the three-dimensional environment outside the content is the second visual appearance when the first input is detected, continuing to display the three-dimensional environment including the content via the display generation component, wherein the three-dimensional environment outside the content has the second visual appearance.

328. in response to detecting the first input via the one or more input devices; In response to a determination that the distinct visual appearance of the three-dimensional environment outside the content is the first visual appearance and that a mode for reducing visual conspicuousness of the three-dimensional environment outside the content is active, reducing the visual salience of the first visual appearance in which the three-dimensional environment outside the content is displayed; and ceasing to reduce the visual salience of the second visual appearance in which the three-dimensional environment outside the content is displayed in accordance with a determination that the distinct visual appearance of the three-dimensional environment outside the content is the second visual appearance.

329. while displaying the three-dimensional environment including the content; in accordance with a determination that a current time at the computer system is a first time while the individual environment mode is the first environment mode, the individual visual appearance of the three-dimensional environment outside the content is the first visual appearance; 329. A method according to any one of claims 325 to 328, wherein, in accordance with a determination that the current time at the computer system is a second time different from the first time, while the individual environment mode is the first environment mode, the individual visual appearance of the three-dimensional environment outside the content is the second visual appearance.

330. in response to detecting the first input via the one or more input devices; 330. The method of any one of claims 325 to 329, comprising reducing the visual prominence of the first visual appearance in which the three-dimensional environment outside the content is displayed in accordance with a determination that the individual visual appearance of the three-dimensional environment outside the content is the first visual appearance and in accordance with a determination that a mode for reducing the visual prominence of the first visual appearance in which the three-dimensional environment outside the content is displayed is active.

331. The mode for reducing the visual salience of the first visual appearance in which the three-dimensional environment outside the content is displayed is active, and the method further comprises: displaying a user interface element selectable to change an activation status of the mode for reducing the visual salience of the first visual appearance in which the three-dimensional environment outside the content is displayed; and detecting, via the one or more input devices, an input directed at the user interface element while displaying the user interface element that is selectable to change the activation status of the mode for reducing the visual salience of the first visual appearance in which the three-dimensional environment outside the content is displayed; 331. The method of claim 330, further comprising: in response to detecting the input directed at the user interface element via the one or more input devices, changing the activation status of the mode for reducing the visual conspicuousness of the first visual appearance in which the three-dimensional environment outside the content is displayed.

332. 332. The method of any one of claims 325 to 331, wherein the second presentation mode comprises playback of the content.

333. 333. The method of any one of claims 325 to 332, wherein the second presentation mode comprises presentation of media content at a discrete location of the content within the three-dimensional environment.

334. 334. The method of any one of claims 325 to 333, wherein the first input for displaying the content in the second presentation mode includes the user's attention being directed to the content being displayed in the first presentation mode.

335. While displaying the content in the first presentation mode, the content has a first size and / or visual prominence within the three-dimensional environment, and the three-dimensional environment outside the content has a first amount of visual prominence; While displaying the content in the second presentation mode, 335. The method of any one of claims 325 to 334, wherein the content has a second size and / or visual prominence within the three-dimensional environment that is greater than the first size and / or visual prominence of the content while the content was displayed in the first presentation mode, and the three-dimensional environment outside the content has a second amount of visual prominence that is less than the first amount of visual prominence that the three-dimensional environment outside the content had while the content was displayed in the first presentation mode.

336. While the environment mode is the individual environment mode, detecting a second input via the one or more input devices to display a system user interface associated with an operating system of the computer system; displaying, via the display generation component, in response to detecting the second input to display the system user interface associated with the operating system of the computer system, the system user interface associated with the operating system of the computer system, the system user interface including one or more first selectable options including a first selectable option selectable to initiate a process of changing the environment mode from the individual environment mode to an environment mode different from the individual environment mode; detecting, while displaying the one or more first selectable options including the first selectable option, a third input via the one or more input devices requesting a change of the environment mode from the individual environment mode to an environment mode different from the individual environment mode; and initiating the process of changing the environmental mode from the individual environmental mode to the environmental mode different from the individual environmental mode in response to detecting the third input requesting changing the environmental mode from the individual environmental mode to the environmental mode different from the individual environmental mode.

337. 337. The method of claim 336, wherein the system user interface is displayed in response to detecting the user's attention directed to a discrete portion of a viewport through which the three-dimensional environment is viewed.

338. detecting, while displaying a first user interface of a first application, a third input via the one or more input devices to display the system user interface associated with the operating system of the computer system; displaying, via the display generation component, a system user interface associated with the operating system of the computer system in response to detecting, while displaying, via the one or more input devices, the third input for displaying the system user interface associated with the operating system of the computer system; and detecting, while displaying a first user interface of a second application different from the first application, a fourth input via the one or more input devices to display the system user interface associated with the operating system of the computer system; and displaying, via the display generation component, a system user interface associated with the operating system of the computer system in response to detecting the fourth input for displaying the system user interface associated with the operating system of the computer system while displaying the first user interface of the second application via the one or more input devices.

339. the three-dimensional environment includes a portion distinct from the content, and the method further comprises: While displaying the three-dimensional environment including the content, detecting, via the one or more input devices, an input corresponding to a request to display a system user interface associated with an operating system of the computer system, the system user interface including at least a control element for controlling an ambient audio volume level corresponding to the portion of the three-dimensional environment; displaying, via the display generation component, a system user interface associated with the operating system of the computer system, including displaying at least the control element for controlling the ambient audio volume level corresponding to the portion of the three-dimensional environment in response to detecting the input corresponding to the request to display the system user interface associated with the operating system of the computer system; detecting an input via the one or more input devices corresponding to a request to change a level of an ambient audio volume level corresponding to the portion of the three-dimensional environment; responsive to detecting an input corresponding to the request to change the level of an environmental audio volume level corresponding to the portion of the three-dimensional environment, changing the environmental audio volume level corresponding to the portion of the three-dimensional environment from a first level to a second level different from the first level without changing the audio volume level of the content.

340. while displaying the three-dimensional environment outside the content in the second environment mode with the first visual appearance; receiving, via the one or more input devices, an input corresponding to a request to change the environment mode in which the three-dimensional environment outside the content is displayed from the second environment mode to the first environment mode; in response to receiving the input corresponding to the request to change the environment mode in which the three-dimensional environment outside the content is displayed from the second environment mode to the first environment mode; 340. The method of any one of claims 325 to 339, comprising: before displaying the three-dimensional environment outside the content in the second visual appearance, the computer system presents a notification indicating that the three-dimensional environment outside the content will be displayed in the second visual appearance in accordance with a determination that the computer system satisfies one or more criteria, the one or more criteria being met when displaying the three-dimensional environment in the first environment mode on the computer system requires displaying the three-dimensional environment in the second visual appearance in response to receiving the input corresponding to the selection of the first environment mode.

341. While displaying the content in the second presentation mode, 341. The method of any one of claims 325 to 340, comprising displaying the content with simulated emissive light effects surrounding the content within the three-dimensional environment via the display generation component.

342. while displaying the content in the second presentation mode and while the environment mode of the three-dimensional environment for controlling the visual appearance of the three-dimensional environment outside the content is the individual environment mode; displaying, via the display generation component, the content with simulated emissive light effects surrounding the content within the three-dimensional environment in accordance with a determination that a mode for reducing visual salience of the three-dimensional environment outside the content is active; 342. The method of claim 325, further comprising: displaying the content without displaying the simulated emissive light effects surrounding the content within the three-dimensional environment via the display generation component in accordance with a determination that the mode for reducing the visual salience of the three-dimensional environment outside the content is inactive.

343. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and one or more programs stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions, the instructions while displaying, via the display generation component, a three-dimensional environment including content in a first presentation mode, the three-dimensional environment including the content; an environment mode of the three-dimensional environment for controlling a visual appearance of the three-dimensional environment outside of the content is a separate environment mode; the three-dimensional environment outside the content displays a three-dimensional environment having a distinct visual appearance based on the distinct environment mode; detecting, via the one or more input devices, a first input for displaying the content in a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode while displaying, via the display generation component, the three-dimensional environment outside the content in the individual environment mode having the individual visual appearance based on the individual environment mode; in response to detecting the first input via the one or more input devices; displaying the content in the second presentation mode, different from the first presentation mode, via the display generation component; when the first input is detected, in accordance with a determination that the individual environment mode is a first environment mode and the individual visual appearance is a first visual appearance, displaying, via the display generation component, the three-dimensional environment including the content, wherein while displaying the three-dimensional environment including the content, the three-dimensional environment outside the content is displayed with a second visual appearance based on the first environment mode, different from the first visual appearance; a computer system that, when the first input is detected, continues displaying the three-dimensional environment including the content via the display generation component in accordance with a determination that the individual environmental mode is a second environmental mode different from the first environmental mode and the individual visual appearance is the first visual appearance, wherein while displaying the three-dimensional environment including the content, the three-dimensional environment outside the content is displayed in the first visual appearance.

344. 1. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs including instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generating component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to: while displaying, via the display generation component, a three-dimensional environment including content in a first presentation mode, the three-dimensional environment including the content; an environment mode of the three-dimensional environment for controlling a visual appearance of the three-dimensional environment outside of the content is a separate environment mode; displaying a three-dimensional environment outside the content, the three-dimensional environment having a distinct visual appearance based on the distinct environment mode; detecting, via the one or more input devices, a first input for displaying the content in a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode, while displaying, via the display generation component, the three-dimensional environment outside the content in the individual environment mode having the individual visual appearance based on the individual environment mode; in response to detecting the first input via the one or more input devices; displaying the content in the second presentation mode, different from the first presentation mode, via the display generation component; when the first input is detected, in accordance with a determination that the individual environment mode is a first environment mode and the individual visual appearance is a first visual appearance, displaying, via the display generation component, the three-dimensional environment including the content, wherein while displaying the three-dimensional environment including the content, the three-dimensional environment outside the content is displayed with a second visual appearance based on the first environment mode, different from the first visual appearance; and continuing to display the three-dimensional environment including the content via the display generation component in accordance with a determination that the individual environmental mode is a second environmental mode different from the first environmental mode and the individual visual appearance is the first visual appearance when the first input is detected, wherein while displaying the three-dimensional environment including the content, the three-dimensional environment outside the content is displayed in the first visual appearance.

345. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and while displaying, via the display generation component, a three-dimensional environment including content in a first presentation mode, the three-dimensional environment including the content; an environment mode of the three-dimensional environment for controlling a visual appearance of the three-dimensional environment outside of the content is a separate environment mode; means for displaying a three-dimensional environment, the three-dimensional environment outside the content having a distinct visual appearance based on the distinct environment mode; means for detecting, via the one or more input devices, a first input for displaying the content in a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode, while displaying, via the display generation component, the three-dimensional environment outside the content in the individual environment mode having the individual visual appearance based on the individual environment mode; in response to detecting the first input via the one or more input devices; displaying the content in the second presentation mode, different from the first presentation mode, via the display generation component; when the first input is detected, in accordance with a determination that the individual environment mode is a first environment mode and the individual visual appearance is a first visual appearance, displaying, via the display generation component, the three-dimensional environment including the content, wherein while displaying the three-dimensional environment including the content, the three-dimensional environment outside the content is displayed with a second visual appearance based on the first environment mode, different from the first visual appearance; and means for continuing to display the three-dimensional environment including the content via the display generation component in accordance with a determination that the individual environmental mode is a second environmental mode different from the first environmental mode and the individual visual appearance is the first visual appearance when the first input is detected, wherein while displaying the three-dimensional environment including the content, the three-dimensional environment outside the content is displayed in the first visual appearance.

346. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and and one or more programs stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for performing the method of any one of claims 325 to 342.

347. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generating component and one or more input devices, cause the computer system to perform the method of any one of claims 325 to 342.

348. 1. A computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the computer system comprising: one or more processors; Memory and and means for performing the method of any one of claims 325 to 342.

Images